RDR-VX410 RMT-D224P

SERVICE MANUAL AEP Model

UK Model
French Model
Australian Model
New Zealand Model

TS-10 MECHANISM

Refer to the SERVICE MANUAL of VHS MECHANI-

CAL ADJUSTMENT MANUAL VII for MECHANICAL
ADJUSTMENTS. (9-921-790-11)

SPECIFICATIONS

System [Tuner section] The above channel coverage merely ensures the
Channel coverage channel reception within these ranges. It does not
[DVD recorder section] RDR-VX410 (B, E1, E2): guarantee the ability to receive signals in all
Laser PAL (B/G, D/K) circumstances.
Semiconductor laser VHF E2 to E12 Aerial out
Audio recording format VHF Italian channel A to H 75-ohm asymmetrical aerial socket
Dolby Digital UHF E21 to E69
Video recording format CATV S01 to S05, S1 to S41 [Timer section]
MPEG Video HYPER S21 to S41 Clock
RDR-VX410 (B): Quartz locked
[VCR section] SECAM (L): (For French model) Timer indication
Format VHF F2 to F10 24-hour cycle
VHS PAL standard UHF F21 to F69 Timer setting
Video recording system CATV B to Q 12 programmes in total (max.)
Rotary head helical scanning FM system HYPER S21 to S41
Video heads RDR-VX410 (GI): Inputs and outputs
Double azimuth four heads PAL (I) LINE 2 IN
Tape speed VHF: Ireland A to J, South Africa 4 to 13 VIDEO IN, phono jack (1)
SP: PAL 23.39 mm/s UHF: B21 to B69 Input signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced,
LP: PAL 11.70 mm/s CATV: S01 to S05, S1 to S20 sync negative
EP: NTSC 11.12 mm/s, HYPER: S21 to S41 AUDIO IN, phono jacks (2)
playback only RDR-VX410 (AU2): Input level: 327 mVrms
Maximum recording/playback time PAL (B/G) Input impedance: more than 47 kilohms
10 hrs. in LP mode (with E300 tape) VHF: E2 to E12 S VIDEO, 4-pin, mini-DIN jack (1)
Rewind time UHF: E21 to E69 Y: 1.0 Vp-p, unbalanced, sync negative
Approx. 1 min (with E180 tape) CATV: S01 to S05, S1 to S41 C: 0.286 Vp-p, load impedance 75 ohms
PAL (B/B)
VHF: R1 to R12
UHF: R21 to R69
— Continued on next page —

PAL PAL SECAM

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER/
DVD RECORDER
LINE OUT General Compatible colour systems
VIDEO OUT, phono jack (1) Power requirements [DVD recorder section]
Output signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, 220-240 V AC, 50 Hz This recorder is designed to record using the PAL
unbalanced, sync negative Power consumption colour system and play back using the PAL or
AUDIO OUT, phono jacks (2) 40 W NTSC colour systems.
Standard output: 327 mVrms Power back-up The signals of the SECAM colour system can be
Back-up duration: 0 min received or recorded but played back in the PAL
Load impedance: 47 kilohms
colour system only.
Output impedance: less than 10 kilohms Operating temperature
[VCR section]
LINE 1 -TV 5°C to 35°C
This recorder is designed to record and play back
21-pin Storage temperature using the PAL colour system.
CVBS IN/OUT –20°C to 60°C
RGB OUT (upstream) Operating humidity Recording of video sources based on other colour
LINE 3/DECODER 25% to 80% systems cannot be guaranteed.
21-pin Dimensions including projecting parts
CVBS IN/OUT and controls (w/h/d) • Abbreviation
RGB IN (downstream) Approx. 430 × 85 × 334 mm AU2 : Australian, New Zealand models
Decoder Mass B : French model
DV IN Approx. 4.9 kg E1, E2 : AEP model
4-pin/i.LINK S100 Supplied accessories GI : UK model
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Remote commander (remote) (1)
OPTICAL, Optical output jack R6 (size AA) batteries (2)
–18 dBm (wave length: 660 nm) Aerial cable (1)
COAXIAL, phono jack Audio/video cord (1)
Output signal: 0.5 Vp-p, 75 ohms RDR-VX410 (B, E1, E2):
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y, PB/CB, P R/ SCART cable (1) (supplied with French model)
CR)
Design and specifications are subject to change
Phono jack
without notice.
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p, 75
ohms
S VIDEO OUT
4-pin, mini-DIN jack
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, unbalanced, sync negative
C: 0.286 Vp-p, load impedance 75 ohms

—2—
 SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following
safety checks before releasing the set to the customer:

1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly- 4. Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious
soldered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder signs of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and
splashes and bridges. recommend their replacement.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are 5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
“pinched” or contact high-wattage resistors.
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

WARNING!! CAUTION:
The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye
WHEN SERVICING, DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER
hazard.
EXIT WITH THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS
NECESSARY TO CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION,
BE SURE TO OBSERVE FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE
THAN 25 cm FROM THE SURFACE OF THE CAUTION
OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED
LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE
OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH
SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS
SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS
PUBLISHED BY SONY.
This appliance is classified as
a CLASS 1 LASER product.
The CLASS 1 LASER
PRODUCT MARKING is
located on the rear exterior.

DANGER VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CAUTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.
VORSICHT KLASSE 3B SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN GEÖFFNET. DIREKTEN KONTAKT MIT DEM
STRAHL VERMEIDEN.
ADVARSEL SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING AF KLASSE 3B VED ÅBNING. UNDGÅ DIREKTE UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING.
ADVARSEL SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING I KLASSE 3B NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES. UNNGÅ DIREKTE EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.
VARNING KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT DIREKT EXPONERA DIG
FÖR STRÅLNINGEN.
VARO! AVATTUNA LUOKAN 3B NÄKYVÄÄ JA NÄKYMÄTÖNTÄ LASERSÄTEILYÄ. VÄLTÄ SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA SÄTEELLE.

Unleaded solder
Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead- This label is located on the laser protective housing inside the
free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead. enclosure.
(Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with
the lead free mark due to their particular size.)

: LEAD FREE MARK

Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.
• Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than
ordinary solder.
Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be
applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time.
Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to
about 350°C.
Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the
heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!
• Strong viscosity
Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than
ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such
as on IC pins, etc.
• Usable with ordinary solder
It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may
also be added to ordinary solder.

—3—
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Precautions 3. Block Diagram .......................................................... 3-1

1 Safety Precautions ······························································ 5
2 Servicing Precautions ························································ 7 4. PCB Diagrams
3 ESD Precautions ································································· 8 4-1 VCR Main PCB ······························································· 4-3
4 Handling the Optical Pick-up ············································· 9 4-2 DVD Main PCB ······························································ 4-7
5 Reset operation after IC203 or IC205 was replaced ········· 10 4-3 Jack PCB ······································································· 4-11
4-4 DV Jack PCB ································································· 4-15
1. General 4-5 Function Timer PCB ······················································ 4-17
Hookups and Settings ······················································ 1-2
Quick Guide to Disc Types ·············································· 1-6 5. Schematic Diagrams
DVD Playback ································································· 1-7 ◆ Block Identification of Main PCB ········································· 5-3
DVD Recording ····························································· 1-11 5-1 S.M.P.S (VCR Main PCB) ·············································· 5-5
DVD Editing ·································································· 1-13 5-2 Power (VCR Main PCB) ················································· 5-7
VCR Playback ······························································· 1-16 5-3 Logic (VCR Main PCB) ·················································· 5-9
VCR Recording ····························································· 1-18 5-4 A/V (VCR Main PCB) ·················································· 5-11
Dubbing (TAPA y DVD) ··········································· 1-21 5-5 Hi-Fi (VCR Main PCB) ················································ 5-13
DV Dubbing (DV t DVD) ·········································· 1-22 5-6 OSD (VCR Main PCB) ················································· 5-15
Settings and Adjustments ·············································· 1-23 5-7 SECAM (VCR Main PCB) ··········································· 5-17
Additional Information ·················································· 1-26 5-8 Function Timer (Function Timer PCB) ························· 5-19
5-9 Encoder (DVD Main PCB) ··········································· 5-21
2. Disassembly and Reassembly 5-10 Decoder (DVD Main PCB) ··········································· 5-23
2-1 Cabinet and PCB ···························································· 2-1 5-11 Video Decoder and Connector (DVD Main PCB) ········ 5-25
2-1-1 Cabinet Top Removal ····················································· 2-1 5-12 DV Interface and 1394 Connector (DVD Main PCB) ··· 5-27
2-1-2 Botton Cover Removal ··················································· 2-1 5-13 Connectors and Power (DVD Main PCB) ····················· 5-29
2-1-3 Ass’y Front Panel Removal ············································ 2-1 5-14 Mux, Nicam TM, Pdc, Scart, Front Jack
2-1-4 Function Timer PCB Removal ······································· 2-1 (JACK PCB) ·································································· 5-31
2-1-5 Chassis Removal ···························································· 2-2 5-15 ADC/DAC, VIC1 (LA73054) Block (JACK PCB) ······· 5-33
2-1-6 VCR Main PCB Removal ·············································· 2-2 5-16 Mts/Tuner (JACK PCB) ················································ 5-35
2-2 Circuit Board Locations ················································· 2-3 5-17 Component/Super Out (JACK PCB) ····························· 5-37
2-3 VCR Deck Parts Locations ············································ 2-4
2-3-1 Top View ········································································ 2-4 6. Alignment and Adjustments
2-3-2 Bottom View ··································································· 2-6 6-1 VCR Adjustment ····························································· 6-1
2-4 VCR DECK ···································································· 2-7 6-1-1 Reference ········································································· 6-1
2-4-1 Holder FL Cassette Ass’y Removal ······························· 2-7 6-1-2 Head Switching Point Adjustment ·································· 6-3
2-4-2 Lever FL Arm Ass’y Removal ······································· 2-7 6-2 VCR Mechanical Adjustment ·········································· 6-4
2-4-3 Lever FL Door Removal ················································ 2-8 6-2-1 Tape Transport System and Adjustment Locations ········· 6-4
2-4-4 Slider FL Drive, Gear FL Cam Removal ······················· 2-8 6-2-2 Tape Transport System Adjustment ································· 6-5
2-4-5 Gear Worm Wheel Removal ··········································· 2-9 6-2-3 Reel Torque ··································································· 6-10
2-4-6 Cable Flat Removal ························································ 2-9
2-4-7 Motor Loading Ass’y Removal ···································· 2-10 7. Troubleshooting ················································· 7-1
2-4-8 Bracket Gear, Gear Joint 2, 1 Removal ························ 2-10
2-4-9 Gear Loading Drive, Slider Cam, 8. Repair Parts List
Lever Load S, T Ass’y Removal ·································· 2-11 8-1 Exploded Views ······························································· 8-2
2-4-10 Gear Loading Drive, Slider Cam, 8-1-1 Cabinet Assembly ···························································· 8-2
Lever Load S, T Ass’y Assembly ································· 2-11 8-1-2 VCR Mechanical Parts (Top Side) ·································· 8-3
2-4-11 Lever Pinch Drive, Lever Tension Drive Removal ······· 2-12 8-1-3 VCR Mechanical Parts (Bottom Side) ···························· 8-4
2-4-12 Lever Tension Ass’y, Band Brake Ass’y Removal ······· 2-12 8-2 Electrical Parts List ························································· 8-5
2-4-13 Lever Brake S, T Ass’y Removal ································· 2-13
2-4-14 Gear Idle Ass’y Removal ············································· 2-13
2-4-15 Disk S, T Reel Removal ··············································· 2-14
2-4-16 Holder Clutch Ass’y Removal ······································ 2-14
2-4-17 Lever Up Down Ass’y, Gear Center Ass’y Removal ··· 2-15
2-4-18 Guide Cassette Door Removal ····································· 2-15
2-4-19 Lever Unit Pinch Ass’y, Plate Joint,
Spring Pinch Drive Removal ········································ 2-16
2-4-20 Lever #9 Guide Ass’y Removal ··································· 2-16
2-4-21 FE Head Removal ························································ 2-17
2-4-22 ACE Head Removal ····················································· 2-17
2-4-23 Slider S, T Ass’y Removal ··········································· 2-18
2-4-24 Plate Ground Deck, Cylinder Ass’y Removal ·············· 2-18
2-4-25 Hook Capstan, Belt Pulley Removal ···························· 2-19
2-4-26 Motor Capstan Ass’y Removal ···································· 2-19
2-4-27 Post #8 Guide Ass’y Removal ······································ 2-20
2-4-28 Level Head Cleaner Ass’y Removal ···························· 2-20
2-4-29 How to Eject the Cassette Tape ···································· 2-20
2-5 The Table of Cleaning, Lubrication and
Replacement Time about Principal Parts ····················· 2-21

—4—
PRECAUTIONS
1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1) Before returning an instrument to the customer, always make a (4) Insulation Resistance Test Cold Check-(1) Unplug the power
safety check of the entire instrument, including, but not limited supply cord and connect a jumper wire between the two prongs
to, the following items: of the plug. (2) Turn on the power switch of the instrument. (3)
Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter between the jumpered
(1) Be sure that no built-in protective devices are defective or have AC plug and all exposed metallic cabinet parts on the instrument,
been defeated during servicing. such as screwheads, antenna, control shafts, handle brackets,
(1)Protective shields are provided to protect both the technician etc. When an exposed metallic part has a return path to the
and the customer. Correctly replace all missing protective chassis, the reading should be between 1 and 5.2 megohm. When
shields, including any removed for servicing convenience. there is no return path to the chassis, the reading must be infinite.
(2)When reinstalling the chassis and/or other assembly in the If the reading is not within the limits specified, there is the
cabinet, be sure to put back in place all protective devices, possibility of a shock hazard, and the instrument must be repared
including, but not limited to, nonmetallic control knobs, and rechecked before it is returned to the customer. See Fig. 2.
insulating fish papers, adjustment and compartment covers/
shields, and isolation resistor/capacitor networks. Do not operate
this instrument or permit it to be operated without all protective
devices correctly installed and functioning. Antenna
Terminal
(2) Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through which adults
or children might be able to insert their fingers and contact a
hazardous voltage. Such openings include, but are not limited
to, excessively wide cabinet ventilation slots, and an improperly Exposed
fitted and/or incorrectly secured cabinet back cover. Metal Part

(3) Leakage Current Hot Check-With the instrument completely

reassembled, plug the AC line cord directly into a 120V AC ohm
ohmmeter
outlet. (Do not use an isolation transformer during this test.)
Use a leakage current tester or a metering system that complies
with American National Standards institute (ANSI) C101.1 Fig. 2 Insulation Resistance Test
Leakage Current for Appliances and Underwriters Laboratories
(UL) 1270 (40.7). With the instrument’s AC switch first in the 2) Read and comply with all caution and safety related notes on or
ON position and then in the OFF position, measure from a known inside the cabinet, or on the chassis.
earth ground (metal water pipe, conduit, etc.) to all exposed
metal parts of the instrument (antennas, handle brackets, metal 3) Design Alteration Warning-Do not alter or add to the mechanical
cabinets, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts, etc.), or electrical design of this instrument. Design alterations and
especially any exposed metal parts that offer an electrical return additions, including but not limited to, circuit modifications and
path to the chassis. the addition of items such as auxiliary audio output connections,
Any current measured must not exceed 0.5mA. Reverse the might alter the safety characteristics of this instrument and create
instrument power cord plug in the outlet and repeat the test. See a hazard to the user. Any design alterations or additions will
Fig. 1. make you, the servicer, responsible for personal injury or
Any measurements not within the limits specified herein indicate property damage resulting therefrom.
a potential shock hazard that must be eliminated before returning
the instrument to the customer. 4) Observe original lead dress. Take extra care to assure correct
lead dress in the following areas:
(1) near sharp edges, (2) near thermally hot parts (be sure that
(READING SHOULD
NOT BE ABOVE leads and components do not touch thermally hot parts), (3) the
0.5mA) AC supply, (4) high voltage, and (5) antenna wiring. Always
LEAKAGE inspect in all areas for pinched, out-of-place, or frayed wiring,
DEVICE CURRENT
UNDER TESTER Do not change spacing between a component and the printed-
TEST circuit board. Check the AC power cord for damage.
TEST ALL
EXPOSED METER 5) Components, parts, and/or wiring that appear to have overheated
SURFACES
or that are otherwise damaged should be replaced with
2-WIRE CORD components, parts and/ or wiring that meet original
specifications.
ALSO TEST WITH EARTH Additionally, determine the cause of overheating and/or damage
PLUG REVERSED GROUND
(USING AC ADAPTER and, if necessary, take corrective action to remove any potential
PLUG AS REQUIRED) safety hazard.

Fig. 1 AC Leakage Test

—5—
6) Product Safety Notice-Some electrical and mechanical parts
have special safety-related characteristics which are often not
evident from visual inspection, nor can the protection they give
necessarily be obtained by replacing them with components rated
for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Parts that have special safety
characteristics are identified by shading, an ( ) or a ( ) on
schematics and parts lists. Use of a substitute replacement that
does not have the same safety characteristics as the
recommended replacement part might create shock, fire and/or
other hazards. Product safety is under review continuously and
new instructions are issued whenever appropriate.

—6—
2 SERVICING PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION: Before servicing units covered by this service manual 2-2 Insulation Checking Procedure
and its supplements, read and follow the Safety Precautions section
of this manual. Disconnect the attachment plug from the AC outlet and turn the
power ON. Connect the insulation resistance meter (500V) to the
Note: If unforseen circumstances create conflict between the blades of the attachment plug. The insulation resistance between
following servicing precautions and any of the safety precautions, each blade of the attachment plug and accessible conductive parts
always follow the safety precautions. Remember: Safety First. (see note) should be more than 1 Megohm.

2-1 General Servicing Precautions Note: Accessible conductive parts include metal panels, input
terminals, earphone jacks, etc.
(1) a. Always unplug the instrument’s AC power cord from the AC
power source before (1) re-moving or reinstalling any
component, circuit board, module or any other instrument
assembly, (2) disconnecting any instrument electrical plug or
other electrical connection, (3) connecting a test substitute in
parallel with an electrolytic capacitor in the instrument.
b. Do not defeat any plug/socket B+ voltage interlocks with
which instruments covered by this service manual might be
equipped.
c. Do not apply AC power to this instrument and/or any of its
electrical assemblies unless all solid-state device heat sinks
are correctly installed.
d. Always connect a test instrument’s ground lead to the
instrument chassis ground before connecting the test
instrument positive lead. Always remove the test instrument
ground lead last.

Note: Refer to the Safety Precautions section ground lead last.

(2) The service precautions are indicated or printed on the cabinet,

chassis or components. When servicing, follow the printed or
indicated service precautions and service materials.

(3) The components used in the unit have a specified flame

resistance and dielectric strength.
When replacing components, use components which have the
same ratings. Components identified by shading, by ( ) or by
( ) in the circuit diagram are important for safety or for the
characteristics of the unit. Always replace them with the exact
replacement components.

(4) An insulation tube or tape is sometimes used and some

components are raised above the printed wiring board for safety.
The internal wiring is sometimes clamped to prevent contact
with heating components. Install such elements as they were.

(5) After servicing, always check that the removed screws,

components, and wiring have been installed correctly and that
the portion around the serviced part has not been damaged and
so on. Further, check the insulation between the blades of the
attachment plug and accessible conductive parts.

—7—
3 ESD PRECAUTIONS

Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD)

Some semiconductor (solid state) devices can be damaged easily
by static electricity.
Such components commonly are called Electrostatically Sensitive
Devices (ESD). Examples of typical ESD devices are integrated
circuits and some field-effect transistors and semiconductor chip
components. The following techniques should be used to help reduce
the incidence of component damage caused by static electricity.

(1) Immediately before handling any semiconductor component or

semiconductor-equipped assembly, drain off any electrostatic
charge on your body by touching a known earth ground.
Alternatively, obtain and wear a commercially available
discharging wrist strap device, which should be removed for
potential shock reasons prior to applying power to the unit under
test.

(2) After removing an electrical assembly equipped with ESD

devices, place the assembly on a conductive surface such as
aluminum foil, to prevent electrostatic charge buildup or
exposure of the assembly.

(3) Use only a grounded-tip soldering iron to solder or unsolder

ESD devices.

(4) Use only an anti-static solder removal devices. Some solder

removal devices not classified as “anti-static” can generate
electrical charges sufficient to damage ESD devices.

(5) Do not use freon-propelled chemicals. These can generate

electrical charges sufficient to damage ESD devices.

(6) Do not remove a replacement ESD device from its protective

package until immediately before your are ready to install it.
(Most replacement ESD devices are packaged with leads
electrically shorted together by conductive foam, aluminum foil
or comparable conductive materials).

(7) Immediately before removing the protective materials from the

leads of a replacement ESD device, touch the protective material
to the chassis or circuit assembly into which the device will be
installed.

CAUTION: Be sure no power is applied to the chassis or circuit,

and observe all other safety precautions.

(8) Minimize bodily motions when handling unpackaged

replacement ESD devices. (Otherwise harmless motion such as
the brushing together of your clothes fabric or the lifting of
your foot from a carpeted floor can generate static electricity
sufficient to damage an ESD device).

—8—
4 HANDLING THE OPTICAL PICK-UP
The laser diode in the optical pick up may suffer electrostatic
breakdown because of potential static electricity from clothing and
your body.

The following method is recommended.

(1) Place a conductive sheet on the work bench (The black sheet
used for wrapping repair parts.)

(2) Place the set on the conductive sheet so that the chassis is
grounded to the sheet.

(3) Place your hands on the conductive sheet (This gives them the
same ground as the sheet.)

(4) Remove the optical pick up block

(5) Perform work on top of the conductive sheet. Be careful not to

let your clothes or any other static sources to touch the unit.

◆ Be sure to put on a wrist strap grounded to the sheet.

◆ Be sure to lay a conductive sheet made of copper etc. Which is
grounded to the table.

WRIST-STRAP
FOR GROUNDING

1M

THE UNIT

CONDUCTIVE SHEET
1M

Fig.3

(6) Short the short terminal on the PCB, which is inside the Pick-
Up ASS’Y, before replacing the Pick-Up. (The short terminal is
shorted when the Pick-Up Ass’y is being lifted or moved.)

(7) After replacing the Pick-up, open the short terminal on the PCB.

—9—
5 Reset operation after IC203 or IC205 was replaced
Be sure to perform the reset by the method described below, if the
IC203 or IC205 used on the DVD Main board was replaced.

Resetting method
1. Enter the Adjustment mode, and press two times the “1” button
on the remote commander.
(For an entering method of Adjustment mode, see 6-1. VCR
Adjustment.)
The tray will automatically open and the version information
will be displayed on the TV screen.
2. Turn the power off.

— 10 —
 RDR-VX410

1. GENERAL This section is extracted from RDR-VX410 instruc-

tion manual. (2-637-391-11)

About this manual

• Instructions in this manual describe the controls on the
remote. You can also use the controls on the recorder if
What is a Video Cassette Recorder/DVD Recorder?
they have the same or similar names as those on the
remote. This is a DVD recorder with built-in VHS video deck, and allows recording/playback of DVD discs and
• The on-screen display illustrations used in this manual VHS tapes. DVD editing is also possible.
may not match the graphics displayed on your TV
screen.
• The explanations regarding discs in this manual refer to
Recording and timer recording Easy dubbing
discs created on this recorder. The explanations do not Record TV programmes on a DVD or VHS tape, Dub in either direction between a DVD disc and
apply to discs that are created on other recorders and
either manually or using the timer. VHS tape with the simple press of a button.
played back on this recorder.
DVD VIDEO

Icon Meaning

+RW Functions available for DVD+RWs

-RWVR
Functions available for DVD-RWs
in VR (Video Recording) mode

-RWVideo Functions available for DVD-RWs

in video mode

+R Functions available for DVD+Rs

-R Functions available for DVD-Rs

Functions available for DVD * Note that copy-protected signals will not be recorded.
DVD VIDEOs

Functions available for VIDEO Easy selection between DVD and Quick access to recorded titles -
CDs, Super VCDs or CD-Rs/CD-
VCD
RWs in video CD format or Super VCR Title List
VCD format
Simply press the DVD or VIDEO button to select Display the Title List to view all titles on a disc
Functions available for music CDs the media format you want to use. and select a title for playback or editing.
CD or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in music CD
format Title List (Original) 10:10

1/4 No. Title Length Edit

Functions available for DATA CDs DVD VIDEO 01 Prog. 1 01:29:03 >

(CD-Rs/CD-RWs containing MP3*

02 Prog. 2 00:31:23 >
DATA CD 03 Prog. 4 01:59:00 >

audio tracks or JPEG image files) 04 Prog. 3 00:58:56 >

T Prog. 1
16.May.2005
Functions available for DATA 08:00

DATA DVD DVDs (DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/

DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs containing
MP3* audio tracks or JPEG image VIDEO
files) DVD

Functions available for VHS

VIDEOs

* MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) is a standard format

defined by ISO/MPEG which compresses audio data.

4 8

A “Title List”
Creating your own programme - One Touch Dubbing - DV Dubbing
Playlist
How to Use the On-Screen Displays the list of the disc contents,
including the recording information and
Connect your digital video camera to the DV IN
Record a programme on a DVD-RW (VR mode), jack and press the ONE TOUCH DUBBING Menus movie thumbnail image, which allows you to
button to dub a DV format tape over to a disc. select a title to play or edit.
then erase, move, or add scenes as you like
without changing the original contents. The following three displays are mainly used to
Title List (Original) 10:10
operate this recorder. Once you become familiar
Control
Original with the basic operations, you will find the 1/4 No. Title Length Edit

01 Prog. 1 01:29:03 >

recorder easy to use. 02 Prog. 2 00:31:23 >
03 Prog. 4 01:59:00 >
04 Prog. 3 00:58:56 >

Dubbing T Prog. 1
02.May.2005
08:00

Playlist B “Timer”
Used to set a new timer recording for a disc or
SYSTEM VHS tape, as well as change or cancel the
MENU
timer recordings you set.
M/m/</,,
ENTER C “Edit”
O RETURN TOOLS Used to create or edit a Playlist (unfinalized
DVD-RWs (VR mode) only).
D “Dubbing”
Used to dub from a disc to a VHS tape and
vice versa, and also dub from a DV format
System Menu tape to a disc.
Operation restrictions The System Menu appears when you press E “Disc Setting”
SYSTEM MENU, and provides entries to all of Used to rename, format, or finalize a disc.
the recorder’s main functions, such as timer F “Setup”
Possible Simultaneous Operations recording and setup. Displays the “Setup” display for setting up the
Select an option by pressing M/m and ENTER. recorder to suit your preferences.
Current Operation
VCR VCR DVD DVD
Playback Recording Playback Recording
Title List (Original) 10:10

Title List
Playing a VHS tape*1 — No No Yes Press ENTER :
Timer

Edit Title Menu for DVD Title List.

Recording on a VHS tape No — Yes Yes*3
Dubbing

Playing a DVD*2 No Yes — No Disc Setting

Setup

Recording on a DVD Yes Yes*3 No —

*1 When DVD is pressed, VCR playback stops.

*2 When VIDEO is pressed, DVD playback stops.
*3 Only the same programme can be recorded on a DVD and a VHS tape.

9 10

1-1
 Selectable options
Sub-menu Selectable options on the System Menu differ
depending on the media type, disc condition, and Hookups and Settings
The sub-menu appears when you select an item
from a list menu (e.g., a title from the Title List operating status.
menu), and press ENTER. The sub-menu displays Example: When a disc or a VHS tape is stopped. Hooking Up the Recorder
options applicable only to the selected item. The
displayed options differ depending on the Type Selectable option Follow steps 1 to 7 to hook up and adjust the
situation and disc type. settings of the recorder.
+RW
Select an option by pressing M/m and ENTER.
*1 Notes
-RWVR
Example: The Title List menu
• Plug cords securely to prevent unwanted noise.
*1
Title List (Original) 10:10 -RWVideo • See the instructions supplied with the components to be
1/4 No. Title Length Edit connected.
*1 *1
01 Prog. 1 01:29:03 >
Play +R • You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that does not
02 Prog. 2 00:31:23
Title Erase > have a SCART or video input jack.
03 Prog. 4 01:59:00
Chapter >
Erase *1 *1 • Be sure to disconnect the mains lead of each
-R
04 Prog. 3 00:58:56 >
Protect component before connecting.
T Prog. 1 Title Name
DVD
02.May.2005 A·B Erase
08:00
Divide Title
VCD Step 1: Unpacking
Options for the selected item
CD
Check that you have the following items:
TOOLS DATA CD • Audio/video cord
(phono plug × 3 y phono plug × 3) (1)
The TOOLS menu appears when you press • Aerial cable (1)
DATA DVD
TOOLS. You can search for a title/chapter/track, • Remote commander (remote) (1)
check the playing and remaining time, or change *2
• R6 (size AA) batteries (2)
audio and repeat settings. The displayed options
*1 Unfinalized disc only
differ depending on the media type.
*2 With a disc inserted
Press M/m to select an option, press </, to
select the desired item, and press ENTER.
To return to the previous display
Example: When you press TOOLS while a Press O RETURN.
DVD-RW (VR mode) is playing.
Notes
• The TOOLS menu may not appear during DVD
Title 1/4
recording.
T
• The System Menu does not appear during recording or
C Chapter 1/1
dubbing.
Time 00:00:25
• You cannot use the DVD or VIDEO buttons with the
Audio ENG Dolby 5.1ch (1/3) System Menu turned on.
Repeat Off

Remain 00:01:30

11 12

Step 2: Connecting the Aerial Cable Step 3: Connecting to Your TV

Connect the aerial cable by following the steps below. Do not connect the mains lead until you reach “Step
5: Connecting the Mains Lead” (page 19). Connecting to the LINE 2 OUT jacks
Connect the supplied audio/video cord to the LINE 2 OUT (VIDEO/AUDIO L/R) jacks of the recorder.
Hookups and Settings

To enjoy higher quality images, connect an S video cord (not supplied) instead of the yellow (video) plug.
When using this connection, be sure to connect the audio cord to the LINE 2 OUT (AUDIO L/R) jacks.

VCR-DVD recorder to AERIAL IN INPUT INPUT

TV or projector
AUDIO
S VIDEO R L VIDEO
(red) (white) (yellow)

TV

S video cord Audio/video cord

to AERIAL OUT (not supplied) (yellow) (supplied)

Aerial cable (supplied)

(white)

: Signal flow (red)

to S VIDEO OUT

VCR-DVD recorder to LINE 2 OUT (VIDEO/AUDIO L/R)

1 Disconnect the aerial cable from your TV and connect it to AERIAL IN on the rear panel of the
recorder.
2 Connect AERIAL OUT of the recorder to the aerial input of your TV, using the supplied aerial
cable.

: Signal flow

When playing “wide screen” images

Some recorded images may not fit your TV screen. To change the picture size, see page 101.

Notes
• During DVD recording, you cannot watch VHS pictures by pressing VIDEO, as the S VIDEO OUT jack will output
DVD video signals only.
• Do not connect your TV’s audio output jacks to the LINE 2 IN (AUDIO L/R) jacks at the same time. This will cause
unwanted noise to come from your TV’s speakers.

13 14

1-2
Connecting to the SCART jack If your TV has component video input jacks
Connect to the LINE 1-TV jack using a SCART cord (not supplied). Be sure to make the connections Connect to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks using a component video cord (not supplied) or three
firmly to avoid hum and noise. video cords (not supplied) of the same kind and length. You will enjoy accurate colour reproduction and
See the operating instructions supplied with the TV to be connected. high quality images.
When you use this connection, select “Video” or “RGB” for the Line 1 output setting in step 14 of Easy When you use this connection, select “On” for the component out setting in step 10 of Easy Setup
Setup (page 22). (page 22).

Hookups and Settings

If your TV accepts progressive 525p/625p format signals, you must use this connection and then set
SCART INPUT “Progressive” to “On” in the “Video” setup (page 102). The PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up when the
TV or projector
recorder outputs progressive signals.
When using this connection, be sure to connect the audio cord to the LINE 2 OUT (AUDIO L/R) jacks.

COMPONENT VIDEO IN INPUT

TV or projector

L AUDIO R
Y PB/CB PR/CR

(green) (blue) (red) (white) (red)

SCART cord
(not supplied)

Audio/video cord (supplied)

Component video cord

(not supplied)
to i LINE 1-TV
VCR-DVD recorder
(green)

(blue) (white)

(red) (red)

: Signal flow
to COMPONENT VIDEO OUT to LINE 2 OUT (AUDIO L/R)

Note
When you connect the recorder to your TV via the SCART jacks, the TV’s input source is set to the recorder
automatically when you turn the recorder on. If necessary, press t TV/VIDEO on the remote to return the input to the
TV.

VCR-DVD recorder
: Signal flow

z Hint
Video signal can also be output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jack when playing a VHS tape.

Note
During DVD recording, you cannot watch VHS pictures by pressing VIDEO, as the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks
will output DVD video signals only.

,continued 15 16

A Connecting to audio L/R jacks *1 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Step 4: Connecting to Your AV Amplifier (Receiver) This connection uses a stereo amplifier’s
(receiver’s) two front speakers for sound.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
*2 “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of
You can enjoy the surround function that creates
Select one of the following patterns A or B, according to the input jack on your AV amplifier (receiver). Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
virtual speakers from two stereo speakers. Select
This will enable you to listen to sound through your AV amplifier (receiver). from “Surround1,” “Surround2,” or “Surround3”
When you use this connection, select “Yes” for the component out setting in step 16 of Easy Setup z Hints
of the surround effects (page 35). • For correct speaker location, see the operating
Hookups and Settings

(page 22). Surround 1 instructions supplied with the connected components.

• Digital audio signal can also be output when playing a
VHS tape.

A INPUT Audio cord Notes

(white) (not supplied) (white) • During DVD recording, you cannot hear VHS sound
L by pressing VIDEO, as the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
jacks will output DVD audio signals only.
AUDIO (red) (red) • After you have completed the connection, make the
R Surround 2 appropriate settings in Easy Setup (page 22). If your
AV amplifier (receiver) has an MPEG audio decoder
AV amplifier function, set “Digital Out” – “MPEG” to “MPEG” in
(receiver) the “Audio” setup (page 103). Otherwise, no sound or
a loud noise will come from your speakers.
to AUDIO OUT L/R
• With a coaxial or optical digital connection, you cannot
use the virtual surround effects of this recorder.
VCR-DVD recorder • This recorder does not support Linear PCM playback
with 3 channels or more.
• When outputting from the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Surround 3 jacks, you cannot switch the bilingual sounds on a
DVD-RW (VR mode) by pressing (audio).
to DIGITAL AUDIO OUT to DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(OPTICAL) (COAXIAL)

Optical digital cord (not supplied) or Coaxial digital cord (not supplied)
Virtual speaker

to optical to coaxial B Connecting to a digital audio input jack

[Speakers]
digital input digital input
[Speakers]
B Use this connection if your AV amplifier
Rear (L) Rear (R) (receiver) has a Dolby*1 Digital, DTS*2, or MPEG
audio decoder and a digital input jack. You can
Front (L) Front (R) enjoy the surround effect of Dolby Digital (5.1ch),
AV amplifier (receiver) DTS (5.1ch), or MPEG audio (5.1ch).
with a decoder
Centre Subwoofer

: Signal flow

,continued 17 18

1-3
 Controlling TVs with the remote 2 (volume) +/– Adjust the volume of
Step 5: Connecting the Step 6: Preparing the your TV
You can adjust the remote control’s signal to
Mains Lead Remote control your TV.
PROG +/– Select the programme
position on your TV
If you connected the recorder to an AV amplifier
t TV/VIDEO Switch your TV’s input
Plug the recorder and TV mains leads into the You can control the recorder using the supplied (receiver), you can also use the supplied remote to
source
mains. After you connect the mains lead, you remote. Insert two R6 (size AA) batteries by control the AV amplifier’s (receiver’s) volume.

Hookups and Settings

must wait for a short while before matching the 3 and # ends on the batteries to the Number buttons, Select the programme
operating the recorder. You can operate the markings inside the battery compartment. When -* position on a Sony TV
Notes
recorder only after the front panel display lights up using the remote, point it at the remote sensor • Depending on the connected unit, you may not be able (wide mode) Switch to or from the
and the recorder enters standby mode. on the recorder. to control your TV or AV amplifier (receiver) with wide mode of a Sony
If you connect additional equipment to this some or all of the buttons below. wide-screen TV
recorder (page 26), be sure to connect the mains • If you enter a new code number, the code number
* If you use the number buttons to select the TV’s
lead only after all connections are complete. previously entered will be erased.
programme position, press -/-- followed by the number
• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the code
buttons for two-digit numbers.
number may be reset to the default setting. Set the
appropriate code number again.
TV/DVD·VIDEO To operate the t TV/VIDEO button
switch
"/1 (for SCART connections only)
The t TV/VIDEO button switches between the
PROG +/–
recorder and the last input source selected on the
Number TV. Point your remote at the recorder when using
to mains buttons, 2 +/– this button. The button works even if the TV/
-/-- DVD·VIDEO switch is set to DVD·VIDEO.
Notes t TV/VIDEO
When you connect the recorder to your TV via the
• If the supplied remote interferes your other Sony DVD
SCART jacks, the TV’s input source is set to the
recorder or player, change the command mode number
for this recorder (page 25). recorder automatically when you turn the recorder
• Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible leakage on. To watch another source, press the t TV/
and corrosion. Do not touch the liquid with bare hands VIDEO button to switch the TV’s input source.
should leakage occur. Observe the following: “TV” appears in the front panel display.
– Do not use a new battery with an old battery, or
batteries of different manufacturers. Code numbers of controllable TVs
– Do not attempt to recharge the batteries. If more than one code number is listed, try
– If you do not intend to use the remote for an extended entering them one at a time until you find the one
period of time, remove the batteries.
that works with your TV.
– If battery leakage occurs, wipe out any liquid inside
the battery compartment, and insert new batteries.
• Do not expose the remote sensor (marked on the Manufacturer Code number
front panel) to strong light, such as direct sunlight or
lighting apparatus. The recorder may not respond to the Sony 01 (default)
remote. 1 Slide the TV/DVD·VIDEO switch to TV. Aiwa 01 (default)
• With normal use, the batteries should last about three to
six months. 2 Hold down "/1. Grundig 11
• Do not leave the remote in an extremely hot or humid
place.
3 Enter your TV’s manufacturer code (see Hitachi 23, 24, 72
• Do not drop any foreign object into the remote casing, below) using the number buttons. Loewe 06, 45
particularly when replacing the batteries.
4 Release "/1. Nokia 15, 16, 69, 73
When the TV/DVD·VIDEO switch is set to
Panasonic 17, 49
TV, the remote performs the following:
Philips 06, 07, 08, 23, 45, 72
Press To Saba 12, 13, 36, 43, 74, 75
"/1 Turn your TV on or off Samsung 06, 22, 23, 71, 72
Sanyo 25

,continued 19 20

Manufacturer Code number Code numbers of controllable AV amplifiers “Initial setting necessary to operate the DVD

Sharp 29
(receivers) Step 7: Easy Setup recorder will be made. You can change them
later using setup.” appears.
If more than one code number is listed, try
Telefunken 12, 13, 36, 43, 74, 75 entering them one at a time until you find the one • If this message does not appear, select “Easy
Follow the steps below to make the minimum Setup” in the “Setup” display to run Easy
Thomson 12, 13, 43, 74, 75 that works with your AV amplifier (receiver).
number of basic adjustments for using the Setup (page 108).
recorder. If you do not complete Easy Setup, it
Toshiba 38
4 Press ENTER.
Hookups and Settings

Manufacturer Code number will appear each time you turn on your recorder.
LG 06 Settings are made in the following order. The setup display for selecting the language
Sony 78, 79, 80, 91
JVC 33 used in the on-screen display appears.
Denon 84, 85, 86 OSD Language Setup
No Disc Easy Setup

Kenwood 92, 93 m
Controlling the volume of your AV Onkyo 81, 82, 83 Tuner and Channel Setup
Select the screen language.

amplifier (receiver) with the remote English

Pioneer 99 m Français
TV/DVD·VIDEO Español
switch Sansui 87 Clock Setup Deutsch
"/1 Technics 97, 98 Italiano
m
Nederlands
Yamaha 94, 95, 96 TV Type Setup
Number
m
buttons 2 +/– 5 Select a language, and press ENTER.
Video Connection Setup The Tuner Preset function automatically
m starts.
No Disc Easy Setup
Audio Connection Setup
1 Slide the TV/DVD·VIDEO switch to
m
Searching for receivable channels.

DVD·VIDEO.
25%

2 Hold down "/1, and enter the Finished! Scanning... Please wait.

manufacturer code (see the table below)

for your AV amplifier (receiver) using the
number buttons.
"/1
3 Release "/1.
The 2 +/– buttons control the AV To set the channels manually, see page 98.
amplifier’s volume.
If you want to control the TV’s volume, slide 6 After the download or search is complete,
the TV/DVD·VIDEO switch to TV. the Clock function automatically starts.
No Disc Easy Setup

z Hint Searching for clock data.

M/m/</,, Please wait.
If you want to control the TV’s volume even when the
ENTER
TV/DVD·VIDEO switch is set to DVD·VIDEO, repeat
the steps above and enter the code number 90 (default). O RETURN

1 Turn on the TV.

2 Press "/1. If the current date and time is not set, set the
The recorder turns on. clock manually.
3 Switch the input selector on your TV so that
the signal from the recorder appears on
your TV screen.

21 22

1-4
 No Disc Easy Setup 12:00
11Press ENTER. 16Select the type of jack (if any) you are 21Press ENTER when “Finish” appears.
The setup display for the i LINE 3/ using to connect to an amplifier (receiver). Easy Setup is finished. All connections and
Set the time and date.
DECODER jack appears. If you did not connect an AV amplifier setup operations are complete.
Day Month Year

Sat
12Select whether or not to use the i LINE (receiver), select “No,” then go to step 21.
If you connected an AV amplifier (receiver)
No Disc Easy Setup 10:10
01 01 2005
3/DECODER jack.
using an audio cord to the LINE 2 OUT Easy Setup is finished.
Select “Yes” if you will use the i LINE 3/ (AUDIO L/R) or AUDIO OUT L/R jacks,

Hookups and Settings

Hour Min Auto Adjust
DECODER jack. select “Yes: LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L),”
12 : 00 On
Otherwise, select “No.” then go to step 21. Finish

13Press ENTER. If you connected an AV amplifier (receiver)

Press M/m to set the day and press ,. Set the The setup display for selecting the type of using either a digital optical or coaxial cord,
month, year, hour, minutes in the same way. video signal output from the i LINE 1-TV select “Yes: DIGITAL OUT.”
Set “Auto Adjust” to “On” to activate the jack appears. 17Press ENTER.
Auto Clock Set function. The recorder adjusts No Disc Easy Setup 10:10 The setup display for selecting the type of
the clock automatically whenever the recorder Dolby Digital signal appears.
is turned off.
To return to the previous display
Select the Line1 Output Signal.
No Disc Easy Setup 10:10 Press O RETURN.
7 Press ENTER. Video
The setup display for selecting the picture size RGB Dolby Digital z Hints
of the connected TV appears. • If your AV amplifier (receiver) has an MPEG audio
D-PCM decoder, set “Digital Out” – “MPEG” to “MPEG” in
No Disc Easy Setup 10:10 Dolby Digital the “Audio” setup (page 103).
• If you want to run Easy Setup again, select “Easy
Select your TV screen type. Setup” in the “Setup” display (page 108).

16 : 9 14Select the type of signal you want to output Note

4 : 3 Letter Box from the i LINE 1-TV jack.
4 : 3 Pan Scan
“Video”: Outputs video signals. 18Select the type of Dolby Digital signal you To record TV programmes using the timer, you must set
the clock accurately.
“RGB”: Outputs RGB signals. want to send to your amplifier (receiver).
Note that if you select “On” in step 10, you If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a Dolby
cannot select “RGB.” Digital decoder, select “Dolby Digital.”
8 Select the setting that matches your TV 15Press ENTER. Otherwise, select “D-PCM.”
type. The setup display for selecting the type of jack
used to connect to your amplifier (receiver)
19Press ENTER.
“4:3 Letter Box”: For standard TVs. The setup display for the DTS signal appears.
Displays “wide screen” pictures with bands appears.
No Disc Easy Setup 10:10
on the upper and lower sections of the screen. No Disc Easy Setup 10:10
“4:3 Pan Scan”: For standard TVs.
Is this recorder connected to an amplifier (receiver)? DTS
Automatically displays “wide screen” Select the type of jack you are using.

pictures on the entire screen and cuts off the On

Yes : LINE2 OUT(R-AUDIO-L)
sections that do not fit. Off
Yes : DIGITAL OUT
“16:9”: For wide-screen TVs or standard TVs No
with a wide screen mode.
For details, see “Video Settings (Video)” on
page 101.
9 Press ENTER. 20Select whether or not you want to send a
The setup display for the component out jacks DTS signal to your amplifier (receiver),
appears.
and press ENTER.
10Select whether or not to use the If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a DTS
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks. decoder, select “On.” Otherwise, select “Off.”
Select “On” if you are using the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks.
Otherwise, select “Off.”

,continued 23 24

If you have a Sony DVD player or No Disc Options 10:10

more than one Sony DVD recorder

Title List Language Connecting Another VCR or Similar Device
Timer Parental
Front Display : Auto When you connect additional equipment to this recorder, be sure to connect the mains lead only after all
If the supplied remote interferes with your other Edit
Command Mode : DVD 3
Sony DVD recorder or player, set the command Dubbing
connections are complete (page 19).
Factory Setting
mode number for this recorder and the supplied See also the instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment.
Hookups and Settings

Disc Setting
remote to one that differs from the other Sony To record on this recorder, see “Recording From Connected Equipment Without a Timer” on pages 57
DVD recorder or player. Setup and 85.
The default command mode setting for this Note that this recorder has a copy guard function. Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit
recorder and the supplied remote is DVD 3. any copying cannot be recorded. For details, see “Before Recording” on pages 47 and 76.
4 Select “Command Mode,” and press
ENTER. Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel
No Disc Options 10:10 Connect another VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder. If the equipment
Title List Language has an S video jack, you can use an S video cord (not supplied) instead of the yellow (video) plug of the
Timer Parental audio/video cord. You can connect a second DVD player and record DVDs.
Front Display : Auto Other VCR, etc.
Edit DVD 1
Command Mode : DVD1
DVDNo
2 OUTPUT
Dubbing
Factory Setting DVD 3 S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO
Disc Setting L R

SYSTEM Setup
MENU
M/m/</,,
ENTER
O RETURN 5 Select the command mode (“DVD 1,”
“DVD 2,” or “DVD 3”), and press ENTER.
6 Slide the COMMAND MODE switch on the
remote so it matches the mode you
selected above. S video cord Audio/video cord
(not supplied) (not supplied)

COMMAND To return to the previous display

MODE switch Press O RETURN.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU.
Note
The System Menu appears.
If the command mode does not match, the recorder’s
2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER. command mode appears on the front panel display when S VIDEO
LINE 2 IN
L R DV IN

to LINE 2 IN
you operate the remote. Set the remote’s command mode
No Disc Setup 10:10
to one that matches the recorder’s.
Title List Tuner Preset
VCR-DVD recorder
Timer Clock Set
Video
Edit
Audio
Dubbing
Features
Disc Setting Options

Setup Easy Setup

: Signal flow

z Hint
3 Select “Options,” and press ENTER. When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound, connect an audio cord to the LINE 2 IN o (audio) L
(MONO) jack.

Notes
• Do not connect the yellow LINE 2 IN t (video) jack when using an S video cord.
• Turn on the recorder to view pictures from the connected equipment.

25 26

1-5
Connecting to the LINE 3/DECODER jack
Connecting to a Satellite or Digital Tuner
Connect another VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 3/DECODER jack using a SCART cord
(not supplied). Connect a satellite or digital tuner to this recorder using the LINE 3/DECODER jack. Disconnect the
When you turn on the connected equipment, the recorder automatically sends the signal from the recorder’s mains lead from the mains when connecting the tuner.
equipment to the TV without turning itself on. When you turn on the tuner, the recorder automatically sends the signal from the tuner to the TV without

Hookups and Settings

turning itself on.
TV To use the Synchro Rec function, see below.
VCR
TV
SCART cord
(not supplied)

to SCART input

to SCART input

to i LINE
VCR-DVD recorder to i LINE1-TV 3/DECODER SCART cord
(not supplied)
Satellite tuner, etc.

Notes
• Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment’s input jack with the other equipment’s output
jack connected to the input jack of this recorder. Noise (feedback) may result. to i to i LINE 3/
VCR-DVD recorder LINE1-TV DECODER
• If you pass the recorder signals via a VCR, you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen.

VCR-DVD recorder VCR TV

Be sure to connect your VCR to the VCR-DVD recorder and your TV in the order shown below. To watch video tapes,
watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV.
Line input 1
If the satellite tuner can output RGB signals
VCR VCR-DVD recorder TV Notes
This recorder accepts RGB signals. If the satellite
tuner can output RGB signals, connect the TV • Synchronized Recording does not work with some
Line input 2 tuners. For details, see the tuner’s operating
SCART connector on the satellite tuner to the
instructions.
LINE 3/DECODER jack. • The recorder cannot record original RGB signals from
the tuner, but records them in the composite video
When you want to use the Synchro Rec function format.
This connection is necessary to use the • When you connect the recorder to your TV via the
Synchronized Recording function. See SCART jacks, the TV’s input source is set to the
“Recording From Connected Equipment With a recorder automatically when you turn the recorder on.
Timer (Synchro Rec)” (pages 54 and 82).
If you are using a B Sky B tuner, be sure to
connect the tuner’s VCR SCART jack to the LINE
3/DECODER jack.

27 28

Quick Guide to Disc Types

Recordable and Playable Discs

Icon used
Disc Formatting Compatibility with other
Disc Type in this
Logo (new discs) DVD players (finalizing)
manual

Playable on DVD+RW
Automatically
DVD+RW +RW compatible players
formatted
(automatically finalized)

Playable only on VR mode

VR Format in VR mode*2
-RWVR compatible players (finalization
mode (page 69)
unnecessary) (page 91)
DVD-
RW
Playable on most DVD players
Video Format in Video
(finalization necessary)
mode -RWVideo mode*2 (page 69)
(page 91)

DVD+R
Playable on DVD+R compatible
Automatically
+R players (finalization necessary)
formatted
(page 91)
DVD+R DL

Playable on most DVD players

Automatically
DVD-R -R (finalization necessary)
formatted
(page 91)

Usable disc versions (as of May 2005) “DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,” “DVD+R DL,”
• 4×-speed or slower DVD+RWs and “DVD-R” logos are trademarks.
• 2×-speed or slower DVD-RWs (Ver.1.1, Ver.1.1
with CPRM*1)
• 4×-speed or slower DVD-RWs (Ver.1.2, Ver.1.2
with CPRM)
• 8×-speed or slower DVD+Rs
• 8×-speed or slower DVD-Rs (Ver.2.0)
• 2.4×-speed DVD+R DL (Double Layer) discs*5

29 30

1-6
 12 cm/8 cm discs

DVD-RW
DVD+RW DVD+R DVD-R
Operation VR mode Video mode

Recording Features Editing Features 12 cm 8 cm 12 cm 8 cm 12 cm 8 cm 12 cm 8 cm 12 cm 8 cm

Quick Guide to Disc Types

Change Erase Playback Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes — Yes Yes
Auto Manual A-B Divide
Rewrite Title Title/ Playlist
Chapter Chapter Erase Title
(page 69) Name Chapter (page 64)
(page 50) (page 62) (page 60) (page 61) Recording Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes — Yes No
(page 63) (page 59)

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes*3/No No Yes No

Playable Discs
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes/Yes Yes Yes Yes
Icon Used
Disc Type Disc Logo In this Characteristics
Manual
Yes Yes No Yes Yes*3/No No No No
Discs such as movies that can be purchased or
DVD VIDEO DVD rented

VIDEO CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in VIDEO CD/

VIDEO CD VCD Super VIDEO CD format (with PBC function)
No Yes No Yes Yes*4/No No No No
Music CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in music CD
CD CD format that can be purchased

CD-Rs/CD-RWs created on a PC or similar

No Yes No Yes Yes*4/No No No No DATA CD DATA CD device in music format, or MP3 or JPEG format
that conforms to ISO9660* Level 1/Level 2

DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs in
DATA DVD — DATA DVD
Discs that cannot be recorded on *1 CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media) is MP3 or JPEG format conforming to UDF.
• DVD-RWs (Ver.1.0) a coding technology that protects copyrights for
• DVD+RWs that are not 2.4×-speed compatible images. 8 cm DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs, and DVD-Rs
*2 Unused DVD-RWs are automatically formatted
• 8 cm discs 8 cm DVD+RW/ recorded with a DVD video camera (Still images
according to the setting of “Format DVD” in — —
• DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs DVD-RW/DVD-R recorded with a DVD video camera cannot be
“Features” setup (page 105). played.)
• DVD-Rs recorded in VR mode (Video *3 Erasing titles only frees up disc space if you erase the
Recording format) last title.
• DVD-Rs with CPRM*1 *4 Erasing titles does not free up disc space.
*5 When using DVD+R DL (Double Layer) discs, see “DVD VIDEO” and “CD” logos are trademarks.
the instructions supplied with the disc.
* A logical format of files and folders on DATA-CDs,
defined by ISO (International Standard Organization).

,continued 31 32

Discs that cannot be played z Hints

• CD-Rs/CD-RWs, other than those recorded in • When playing a DVD+RW, DVD-RW, DVD+R, and
music CD format, MP3 or JPEG format, or NO.
RDR-VX410
DVD Playback DVD-R, you can select the title from the Title List
menu. See “Playing a Title From the Title List”
Video CD format
(page 39).
• Data part of CD-Extras
• CD-ROMs
X
Playing • To play DATA CDs or DATA DVDs containing MP3
Region code tracks or JPEG files, see pages 42 and 43.
• DVD-ROMs +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R DVD • If you inserted a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD, or CD,
• DVD Audio discs VCD CD DATA CD DATA DVD playback starts automatically depending on the disc.
• DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs Music discs encoded with copyright protection
• DVD-Rs recorded in VR mode (Video technologies Notes
Quick Guide to Disc Types

Recording format) This product is designed to playback discs that

Z • To play a disc recorded with other equipment on this
• DVD-Rs with CPRM conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard. recorder, finalize the disc on the recording equipment
Recently, various music discs encoded with DVD
• DVD-RAMs first.
• HD layer on Super Audio CDs copyright protection technologies are being • For simultaneous VHS and DVD operation, see page 9.
• DVD VIDEOs with a different region code marketed by some record companies. Please be
(see page 33) aware that among those discs, there are some that
Using the DVD’s Menu
do not conform to the CD standard and may not be
Note on playback operations of DVD VIDEOs/ playable by this product. +RW -RWVideo +R -R DVD
VIDEO CDs When you play a DVD VIDEO, or a finalized
Some playback operations of DVD VIDEOs/ Notes TOP MENU MENU DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD+R, or
VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by software • Some DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs, or DVD-R, you can display the disc’s menu by
producers. Since this recorder plays DVD CD-RWs/CD-Rs cannot be played on this recorder due pressing TOP MENU or MENU.
VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs according to the disc to the recording quality or physical condition of the
contents the software producers designed, some disc, or the characteristics of the recording device and H
playback features may not be available. Also, see authoring software. The disc will not play if it has not
been correctly finalized. For more information, see the x
the instructions supplied with the DVD VIDEOs/
operating instructions for the recording device.
VIDEO CDs. • You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the same
DVD-RW. To change the disc’s format, reformat the
Note on DualDiscs disc (page 69). Note that the disc’s contents will be
A DualDisc is a two sided disc product which erased after reformatting.
mates DVD recorded material on one side with • You cannot shorten the time required for recording
digital audio material on the other side.
However, since the audio material side does not
even with high-speed discs. Also, you cannot record on
the disc if the disc is not 1x speed compatible.
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.
conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard, • It is recommended that you use discs with “For Video”
printed on their packaging.
2 Press Z (open/close), and place a disc on
playback on this product is not guaranteed. the disc tray.
• You cannot add new recordings to DVD-RWs (Video
mode) or DVD-Rs that contain recordings made on
Region code (DVD VIDEO only) other DVD equipment.
Your recorder has a region code printed on the rear • You may not be able to further record on a DVD+RW
of the unit and will only play DVD VIDEOs recorded on other equipment. Note that recording on
(playback only) labelled with identical region such discs may cause the recorder to rewrite the DVD
codes. This system is used to protect copyrights. menu.
DVD VIDEOs labeled ALL will also play on this • If the disc contains PC data unrecognizable by this
recorder. recorder, the data may be erased. Playback side facing down
If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO, a
message will appear on the TV screen to indicate
that the disc is not playable. Depending on the 3 Press Z to close the disc tray.
DVD VIDEO, no region code indication may be Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front
labelled even though playing the DVD VIDEO is panel display.
prohibited by area restrictions. 4 Press H (play).
Playback starts.

To stop playback
Press x (stop).
33 34

1-7
 Button Operation Disc
Playback Options
SUR Surround lets you enjoy surround sound effects by using All discs
(surround) sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from a stereo
TV or two front speakers (page 18).
Z Selects one of the effects when pressed repeatedly.
“Off”: No surround effect
“Surround1”: Creates one set of virtual surround speakers.
Number buttons “Surround2”: Creates two sets of virtual surround
speakers.
“Surround3”: Creates three sets of virtual surround
speakers.
SUR This feature is effective when you use two separate front

DVD Playback
MENU speakers.
M/m/</,,
ENTER / • Replays or briefly fast forwards a scene when pressed
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo
O RETURN (replay/advance) during playback.
/ > • Goes to the previous or next frame when pressed during +R -R DVD
. H pause mode.

x ./> • Goes to the beginning of the current or next title/chapter/ All discs
ZOOM X (previous/next) scene/track and starts playback when pressed during
playback.
• Goes to the beginning of the previous title/chapter/scene/
REPEAT track when . is pressed within three seconds after
starting a title/chapter/scene/track.

Fast reverses or fast forwards the disc when pressed during All discs
Button Operation Disc (fast reverse/fast playback.
*1
forward) Search speed changes with each press: FF1 with sound
Z (open/close) Stops playing and opens the disc tray. All discs (Scan Audio) is
fast reverse fast forward available for DVDs
(audio) Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc when
DVD VCD FR1 T t FF1*1 with Dolby Digital
pressed repeatedly. FR2*2 T T t t FF2*2 soundtracks.
DVD : Selects the audio source. FR3*3 T T T t t t FF3*3 *2 FR2 and FF2 are not
available for MP3.
VCD : Selects stereo or monaural audio tracks. *3 FR3 and FF3 are only
available for DVDs
(subtitle) Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly. .

and VIDEO CDs.

DVD

(angle) Selects an angle when pressed repeatedly. Plays in slow motion when pressed in pause mode.
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo
DVD (slow) Playback speed changes with each press:
If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on
+R -R DVD
the disc, “ ” appears in the front panel display.
reverse slow motion forward slow motion VCD
*
ZOOM Zooms into a scene during playback or still mode when T t
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo TT tt * Playback direction
pressed repeatedly.
Magnification changes as follows: +R -R DVD TTT ttt only
normal t ×2 t ×4 t normal VCD
X (pause) Pauses playback. All discs
The zoom function may not work depending on the DVD. If you pause playback for more than five minutes, playback
To zoom in a JPEG image, see page 44. starts automatically.

,continued 35 36

– you edit the title after stopping playback.

Button Operation Disc Playing quickly with sound (Scan – you make a recording.
REPEAT Displays the items to be repeated when pressed. Audio) (DVDs with Dolby Digital soundtracks
Select an item using M/m, and press ENTER. +RW -RWVR -RWVideo
only) Repeating a specific portion
To cancel Repeat Play, select “Off” and press ENTER.
Press O RETURN to turn off the display.
+R -R DVD (Repeat A-B Play)
VCD *
When playing a DVD You can play quickly with dialogue or sound
“Chapter”: Repeats the current chapter. during FF1 fast-forward of a DVD with Dolby +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R DVD
“Title”: Repeats the current title on a disc. Digital soundtracks. Simply press M during *
VCD
“A-B” (Repeat A-B Play): Repeats a specific portion playback.
(page 38). * With PBC function off
1 During playback, press REPEAT.
When playing a VIDEO CD (with PBC function off) z Hint
“Track”: Repeats the current track. To turn off the Scan Audio function, set “Scan Audio” to 2 Select “A” using M/m.
DVD Playback

“Disc”: Repeats all of the tracks. “Off” in the “Audio” setup (page 104). 3 Press ENTER at the starting point (point A) of
“A-B (Repeat A-B Play)”: Repeats a specific portion the portion to be played repeatedly.
(page 38). Note “A-” appears.
Selects the item to be repeated when pressed repeatedly. Sound will be interrupted during Scan Audio. 4 Continue playing or press m/M to locate
To cancel Repeat Play, select “Off.” CD DATA CD DATA DVD the ending point (point B), and press ENTER.
When playing a CD Playing VIDEO CDs with PBC Repeat A-B Play starts.
“Track”: Repeats the current track. functions
“Disc”: Repeats all of the tracks. To return to normal playback, press REPEAT to
When playing a DATA CD/DATA DVD (MP3 audio) VCD select “Off” and press ENTER. Press O
“File”: Repeats the current track. PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play RETURN to turn off the display.
“Folder”: Repeats the current album. VIDEO CDs interactively using a menu on your
TV screen. * Only with PBC function off

To resume normal playback, press H. When you start playing a VIDEO CD with PBC
functions, a menu appears. Playing restricted DVDs (Parental
z Hints • Sound will be interrupted during Scan Audio Select an item using the number buttons and press Control)
• You can change playback options, such as subtitle, (page 38). ENTER. Then follow the instructions in the menu
audio track, angle, etc., using the TOOLS menu (press H when “Press SELECT” appears). DVD
(page 11). Notes on playing DTS soundtracks on a CD Operations differ depending on the disc. See the If you play a restricted DVD, a message appears
• During playback or pause mode, the recorder’s m/ When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive noise instructions supplied with the disc.
M buttons and the remote’s ./> buttons work asking whether you want to override the
will be heard from the analog stereo jacks. To restriction.
the same way (page 36). Hold the buttons down during
avoid possible damage to the audio system, the To cancel PBC Playback
playback to fast reverse or fast forward. In pause mode,
consumer should take proper precautions when Press MENU to display “Menu: Off.” To use the 1 Select “OK” and press ENTER.
you can play in slow motion. Three speeds are
the analog stereo jacks of the recorder are PBC functions, press MENU again to display The display for entering your password
available, depending on the duration of the press.
• See “DVD Audio/Subtitle Language” on page 124 for connected to an amplification system. To enjoy “Menu:On.” appears.
the meaning of the language abbreviation. DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external 2 Enter your four digit password using the
5.1-channel decoder system must be connected to Resuming playback from the point number buttons.
Notes the digital jack of the recorder. The recorder starts playback.
where you stopped the disc (Resume
• You cannot use the repeat play function with VIDEO
CDs while the PBC function is on (page 38). Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS soundtrack Play) To register or change the password, see “Parental
• When the playback signal does not contain a signal for DTS audio signals are output only through the (DVD VIDEOs only)” on page 107.
the surround speakers, the surround effects will be DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL or Press H again after stopping a disc to resume
difficult to hear. OPTICAL) jack. playback from the same point.
• When you select one of the surround modes, turn off When you play a DVD with DTS soundtracks, set To start from the beginning, press x twice, and
the surround settings of the connected TV or amplifier “Digital Out” – “DTS” to “On” in the “Audio” press H.
(receiver). setup (page 103).
• If you pause playback of a CD, or DATA CD/DATA The point where you stopped playing is cleared
DVD containing MP3 audio tracks, playback will not when:
start until you press H or X. – you open the disc tray.
• Make sure that your listening position is between and – you play another title.
at an equal distance from your speakers, and that the
– you switch the Title List menu to original or
speakers are located in similar surroundings.
Playlist (DVD-RW (VR mode) only).
,continued 37 38

1-8
 D Clock
Locking the recorder (Child Lock)
Playing a Title From the 4 Select the title, and press ENTER. Searching for a Title/
You can lock all of the buttons on the recorder so
that the settings are not cancelled by mistake. Title List The sub-menu appears.
Chapter/Track, etc.
5 Select “Play,” and press ENTER.
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R Playback starts from the selected title on the +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R DVD
disc.
The Title List menu displays the program titles on VCD
the disc. You can search a DVD by title or chapter, and
About the Title List for DVD-RWs (VR mode) VIDEO CD by track or scene. As titles and tracks
You can switch the Title List to show original or are assigned individual numbers on the disc, select
"/1 x Playlist. the title or track by entering its number. You can
DVD

DVD Playback
While the Title List menu is turned on, press also search for a scene using the time code.
ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST repeatedly to select
With the recorder turned on, hold down "/1 on either “Title List (Original)” or “Playlist.”
the recorder. The recorder turns off and “CHILD For details, see “Edit options for DVD-RWs (VR
LOCK” appears in the front panel display. The mode)” on page 58.
indicator remains lit if there is a timer setting. The ORIGINAL/
PLAYLIST TITLE LIST Number
recorder will not work except for timer recordings. MENU To turn off the Title List buttons
TOP MENU Press TITLE LIST.
M/m/</,,
To unlock the recorder, hold down "/1 on the ENTER
recorder until “CHILD LOCK” disappears from
Notes
the front panel display. The recorder is unlocked
and turns on. • The Title List does not appear for DVD-RWs (Video
M/m/</,,
mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs that have been finalized. ENTER
To view a title, press TOP MENU or MENU (page 34).
To stop timer recording while the recorder is
locked, press x twice. The recording stops and the
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder. • The Title List may not appear for discs created on other
DVD recorders.
TOOLS

recorder is unlocked. 2 Place a disc on the disc tray. • Letters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “*.”
1 Press TOOLS during playback.
Note
3 Press TITLE LIST. The TOOLS menu appears.
Example: DVD-RW (VR mode)
The recorder will be unlocked when: 2 Select a search method.
– you stop timer recording by pressing x. “Title” (for DVDs)
– you insert a tape. 1
“Chapter” (for DVDs)
Title List (Original) 10:10 4 “Track” (for VIDEO CDs with PBC function
1/4 No. Title Length Edit
off)
01 Prog. 1 01:29:03 > 3
2 02 Prog. 2 00:31:23 >
“Time” (for DVDs/VIDEO CDs): Searches
03 Prog. 4 01:59:00 > for a starting point by entering the time code.
04 Prog. 3 00:58:56 >
3 Press M/m/</, to select the number of
T Prog. 1 the title, chapter, track, etc., you want, or
3 02.May.2005
08:00 press the number buttons to enter the time
code.
For example: “Time”
A Title type (DVD-RWs (VR mode) To find a scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes, and 20
only): seconds, enter “21020.”
Displays the title type, “Title List If you make a mistake, wait a moment until
(Original)” or “Playlist.” the display returns to the elapsed playing time
B Movie thumbnail image display, then select another number.
C Title information: 4 Press ENTER.
Displays the title number, title name, The recorder starts playback from the selected
recording date, and recording mode. point.
“ ” indicates a protected title, while To turn off the display, press TOOLS.
“ ” indicates unprotected.

,continued 39 40

Note
2 Press </, to select the bookmark to be 4 Select an album, and press ENTER.
Depending on the disc, you may not be able to use the
erased.
Playing MP3 Audio Tracks Music 10:10

TOOLS menu to search for a title/chapter/track, or enter 3 Press CLEAR. Repeat:Off Surround:Off
Stop 00:00:00
the time code for a playback point. DATA CD DATA DVD
Note MP3_001 Prev Directory

You can play MP3 audio tracks on DATA CDs 0/9 01-Track1.mp3
Bookmarking a favourite scene When you eject the disc, the bookmark information is
(CD-Rs/CD-RWs) or DATA DVDs (DVD+RWs/ 02-Track2.mp3
cleared.
(Bookmark) DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs). 03-Track3.mp3
04-Track4.mp3

+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R 05-Track5.mp3

DVD
You can have the recorder store specific portions
DVD
of a disc in memory and play them immediately 5 Select a track, and press ENTER.
DVD Playback

whenever you want (Bookmark). Up to ten Playback starts from the selected track.
bookmarks per disc can be set. When a track or album is being played, the
title is shown in a box.

To stop playback
TOP MENU
M/m/</,, Press x.
ENTER
CLEAR O RETURN To pause playback
H Press X.
To restart playback, press H or X.
x
M/m/</,,
To play repeatedly
X
ENTER Press REPEAT repeatedly during playback.
REPEAT “Off”: Does not play repeatedly.
“File”: Repeats the current track.
“Folder”: Repeats the current album.

1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder. To return to the previous display
2 Place a DATA CD/DATA DVD on the disc Press O RETURN.
tray. To switch between MP3 audio tracks and JPEG
MARKER
When you inserted a DATA CD/DATA DVD
SEARCH image files
containing MP3 audio tracks and JPEG image
Press x, and press TOP MENU.
files, the display for selecting a media type
During playback, press MARKER at a favourite
appears.
scene. About MP3 audio tracks
The bookmark is set. 10:10
You can play back DATA CDs (CD-Rs/CD-RWs)
Music
or DATA DVDs (DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/
Press ENTER :
To play from bookmarks Photo DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs) recorded in MP3 (MPEG-1
Music menu for this CD Audio Layer III) format. However, the discs must
1 During playback, press SEARCH. be recorded according to ISO9660 Level 1/Level
2 or Joliet format and DATA DVDs of Universal
Search 01 02 03 04 05 -- -- -- -- -- N:5
Disk Format (UDF) for the recorder to recognize
If you insert a DATA CD/DATA DVD the tracks (or files).
2 Press </, to select a bookmark, and press See the instructions supplied with the CD-R/CD-
ENTER. containing only MP3 audio files, the “Music”
display appears. Go to step 4. RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW drives and the recording
Playback starts from the selected bookmark. software (not supplied) for details on the recording
To erase bookmarks
3 Select “Music,” and press ENTER. format.
The “Music” display appears.
1 During playback, press SEARCH.

41 42

1-9
z Hints 4 Select a folder, and press ENTER. To return to the previous display
• Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start
playback, it is recommended that you create albums Playing JPEG Image Files Directory information
Press O RETURN.
with no more than two trees.
To switch between MP3 audio tracks and JPEG
• When playback of all the MP3 audio tracks within the DATA CD DATA DVD Photo 10:10

album finishes, the recorder stops. Slide Show

image files
You can play JPEG image files on DATA CDs \\abc\defg Press x, and press TOP MENU.
Notes (CD-Rs/CD-RWs) or DATA DVDs (DVD+RWs/
DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs). z Hint
• The recorder may not be able to play some DATA CDs You can also start the slide show by pressing H in step
or DATA DVDs created in the Packet Write format. 5 above.
• The recorder will play any data with the extension
“.MP3,” even if they are not in MP3 format. Playing
such data may generate a loud noise which could
Page 1 / 2 Notes
DVD

DVD Playback
damage your speaker system. • You cannot use M/m/</, to move the image within
• Only one session of a multi-session DATA-DVD can To display the previous/next page, press the screen while zooming.
be played back. ./>. • Slide show can play in only one direction.
• The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in • You cannot rotate or zoom during slide show.
MP3PRO format. 5 Select an image file, and press ENTER. • If you select “ ” in the rotated image display,
• The recorder can recognize up to 499 MP3 audio tracks The selected image is displayed over the the images in the “Photo” display will not be
within a single album. The recorder may not recognize entire screen. rotated.
some discs depending on the recording device used for TOP MENU To display the previous/next image, press
M/m/</,,
recording or the disc condition.
• The recorder can play MP3 audio tracks recorded in the
ENTER ./>. About JPEG image files
following sampling frequencies: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, O RETURN TOOLS
The following menu icons appear in the upper You can play back DATA CDs (CD-Rs/CD-RWs)
48 kHz. or DATA DVDs (DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/
• ID3 tags cannot be displayed. ./> part of the screen.
: Returns to the “Photo” display. DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs) recorded in JPEG format.
• Only alphabet and numbers can be used for album or H
track names. Anything else is displayed as an asterisk.
x : Starts the slide show (page 44). However, the discs must be recorded according to
: Rotates the image (page 44). ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 or Joliet format and
: Zooms the image (page 44). DATA DVDs of Universal Disk Format (UDF)
Press TOOLS to turn on/off the menu icons. for the recorder to recognize the tracks (or files).
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder. See the instructions supplied with the CD-R/CD-
RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW drives and the recording
2 Place a DATA CD/DATA DVD on the disc To play the slide show software (not supplied) for details on the recording
tray. format.
When you insert a DATA CD/DATA DVD 1 Press </, to select “ ,” and press
containing MP3 audio tracks and JPEG image ENTER. z Hint
files, the display for selecting a media type The “Slide Show Speed” menu appears. If you add numbers (01, 02, 03, etc.) to the front of the
appears. “ ”: Slow file names, the files will be played in that order.
“ ”: Normal
10:10 “ ”: Fast Notes
Music 2 Press </, to select the desired play speed, • The recorder can only play the files with the extension
Press ENTER :
and press ENTER. “.JPG” or “.JPEG.”
Photo
Slide show starts from the selected image. To • Some DATA CDs or DATA DVDs cannot be played
Music menu for this CD on this recorder depending on file format.
stop playing, press x.
• If you add the extension “.JPG” or “.JPEG” to data not
in JPEG format, a message appears indicating that the
To rotate the selected image format is not supported.
Press </, to select “ ,” and press ENTER. • Only one session of a multi-session DATA-DVD can
If you insert a DATA CD/DATA DVD Each time you press ENTER, the image turns be played back.
containing only JPEG files, the “Photo” clockwise by 90°. • Depending on the disc or the size of image files,
display appears. Go to step 4. playback may take some time to start.
3 Select “Photo,” and press ENTER. To zoom in an image • The recorder can recognize up to 999 JPEG image files
within a single folder. The recorder may not recognize
The “Photo” display appears. Press </, to select “ ,” and press ENTER.
some discs depending on the recording device used for
Each time you press ENTER, the magnification
recording or the disc condition.
changes as follows: • Progressive and lossless compression JPEG image files
2× t 4× t 2× t normal are not supported.

,continued 43 44

• The image size that the recorder can display is limited E Programme position or input source*
to width 32 - 7680 pixels by height 32 - 8192 pixels.
Displaying the Playing Time F Date and time
and Play Information * Title type (original or Playlist) for DVD-RWs (VR
mode).
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R DVD
VCD CD DATA CD DATA DVD Viewing information on the front
panel display
You can check disc information, such as playing
time, recording mode, and remaining disc space. You can view the information on the front panel
display.

Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly.

DVD Playback

The displays differ depending on the disc type or

playing status.

Example: When playing a DVD

Playing time of the current title

DISPLAY TIME/TEXT

Current title number and current chapter

number

Press DISPLAY.
The information display appears. Clock
Each time you press the button, the display
changes as follows:
Disc and tape information/date and time Example: When a DVD is stopped
m Clock
Disc information only m
m Current title and chapter number
No display m
Remaining disc space
m
Play Stop Programme position or input source
1:23:45 0:30:00
HQ SP Example: When playing a CD
Rem 16:15 Rem 01:30
Playing time of the current track
Original Prog.1
m
Current track number
Mon 02 May. 2005 10:10
m
Clock

◆ DVD
A Playing status
B Playing time
C Recording mode
D Remaining disc space (in stop mode)
Remaining time of the current title (during
playback)
,continued 45 46

1-10
 Recording mode Recording time Unrecordable pictures
DVD Recording
(minute) DVD Recording Without the
Pictures with copy protection cannot be recorded
HQ (High quality) 60
on this recorder. Recording stops when a copy Timer
Before Recording HSP R 90 guard signal is detected. +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R
SP (Standard mode) 120
Copy control Recordable discs
Before you start recording… LSP r 150 signals TV/DVD·VIDEO
• This recorder can record on various discs types. switch
LP r 180 Copy-Free Z
Select the disc type according to your needs +RW -RWVR -RWVideo
DVD VIDEO
(page 30). EP r 240 +R -R
PROG +/–
• Check that the disc has enough available space SLP r 360
for the recording (page 45). For DVD+RWs or Copy-Once -RWVR
INPUT
DVD-RWs, you can free up disc space by SEP (Long duration) 480 Ver.1.1 with CPRM* SELECT
erasing titles (page 59). Ver.1.2 with CPRM* DISPLAY t TV/VIDEO
Note

DVD Recording
Copy-Never None
z Hint Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies with the
To play a disc recorded with this recorder on other recording time. * The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM
equipment, finalize the disc (page 91). – Recording a programme with poor reception, or a compatible equipment (page 31).
programme or video source of low picture quality
Notes – Recording on a disc that has already been edited
– Recording only a still picture or just sound H
• Timer recordings cannot be made if the recorder is
turned on (page 50). The recorder automatically turns x
off after a recording has finished. Recording stereo and bilingual z REC
X
• This recorder records at ×1 speed.
• This recorder shares a single tuner for both the DVD programmes REC MODE
recorder and the VCR. You cannot record different
The recorder automatically receives and records
programmes to a DVD and a VHS tape at the same
time. stereo and bilingual programmes based on the
NICAM system.
Recording mode A DVD-RW (VR mode) can record both main and
sub sounds. Press the (audio) button to
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.

Like the SP or LP recording mode of VCRs, this switch between main and sub when playing the 2 Press Z (open/close), and place a
recorder has eight different recording modes. disc. recordable disc on the disc tray.
Select a recording mode according to the time and A DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD+R,
picture quality you need. For example, if picture or DVD-R can record only one sound track (main
quality is your top priority, select the High Quality or sub) at a time. Select the sound track using the
mode (HQ). If recording time is your priority, “Setup” display before recording starts. Set “DVD
Super Extended Play mode (SEP) can be a Bilingual Rec.” to “Main” (default) or “Sub” in
possible choice. Note that the recording time in the the “Features” setup (page 106).
following table is an approximate guide.
NICAM system Recording side facing down
Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the When a stereo or bilingual NICAM based
recording modes. programme is received, “STEREO” and 3 Press Z to close the disc tray.
“NICAM” appear in the front panel display. Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front
I want to record with the To record a NICAM programme, be sure to set panel display.
best possible picture “Manual Set” – “Tuner Audio” to “NICAM” Unused DVD-RWs are formatted in VR mode
quality, so I’ll select HQ.
(default) in the “Tuner Preset” setup (page 98). If automatically. To format in Video mode, see
the sound is not clear when listening to NICAM page 105.
broadcasts, select “Standard.”
4 Press PROG +/– or INPUT SELECT
z Hint repeatedly to select the programme
You can select the audio (main or sub) while recording position or input source you want to
bilingual programmes using the (audio) button. record.
This does not affect the recorded sound.

,continued 47 48

5 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the • If there is a power failure, the programme you are A Disc type
recording mode. recording may be erased.
• You cannot change the programme position or input B Recording status DVD Timer Recording
The display changes on the TV screen as
follows:
source during recording.
C Recording time (Standard/VIDEO Plus+)
HQ HSP SP LSP Recording using the Quick Timer D Recording mode +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R
(One-touch Timer Recording) E Remaining disc space
SEP SLP EP LP You can set the timer for a total of 12 programmes
You can set the recorder to record in 30-minute F Programme position or input source together with DVD and VCR timer recording, up
For details about the recording mode, see to one month in advance.
increments.
page 47. z Hint Note that the maximum continuous recording time
6 Press z REC.
1 Press DVD to oparate the DVD recorder. You can view the information also in the front panel for a single title is 12 hours. Contents beyond this
display. Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly to change the
Recording starts. 2 Press z REC repeatedly to set the display. Note that TIME/TEXT does not work during
time will not be recorded.
There are two methods to set the timer: the
Recording continues until you stop the duration. One-touch Timer Recording.
recording or the disc is full. standard method and VIDEO Plus+ method.
Each press increases the time by 30 minutes,
• Standard: Set the date, time, and programme
DVD Recording

up to eight hours (12 hours for DVD+R DL Creating chapters in a title position of the programme manually.
(Double Layer) discs).
To stop recording The recorder will automatically divide a recording • VIDEO Plus+: Enter the PlusCode number
(Normal designated for each TV programme (page 52).
Press x. 0:30 1:00 7:30 8:00 recording) (a title) into chapters by inserting chapter marks at
Note that it may take a few seconds for the 5 or 15-minute intervals during recording. Select
recorder to stop recording. the interval, “5 min” (default) or “15 min” in Note
“c” and “OTR” light up, and the remaining
“DVD Auto Chapter” of “Features” setup The recorder must be in standby mode for the timer
recording time appears in the front panel
To pause recording (page 105). recording to be made.
display.
Press X. If you do not want to divide titles, select “Off.”
When the counter reaches “0:00,” the recorder
To restart recording, press X again. stops recording and turns off. Setting the timer manually
z Hint
To watch another TV programme while You can create chapters manually when playing (Standard)
DVD+RWs or DVD-RWs (VR mode) (page 62).
recording To cancel the Quick Timer
1 Slide the TV/DVD·VIDEO switch to TV. Press z REC repeatedly until the counter appears
in the front panel display. The recorder returns to Z )/1
2 Press t TV/VIDEO to set the TV to the TV
normal recording mode. DVD
input.
3 Select another programme position on the TV. To stop recording.
Press x twice.
To watch a VHS tape while recording Note that it may take a few seconds for the
Press VIDEO to operate the VCR, insert a tape, recorder to stop recording.
then press H. SYSTEM TIMER
MENU
z Hints
Checking the disc status while M/m/</,,
• To play a disc recorded with this recorder on other recording ENTER
equipment, finalize the disc (page 91).
• To select a programme position, you can use the You can check the recording information such as
number buttons. Enter the programme position recording time or disc type.
number, and press ENTER.
x
• You can select a video source from the LINE jacks Press DISPLAY during recording.
using the INPUT SELECT button. The information display appears.
• You can turn off the TV during recording. If you are Press the button repeatedly to change the display
using a satellite or digital tuner, make sure to leave it (page 45). 1 Press DVD to oparate the DVD recorder.
on.

Notes Record
0:00:03
• Recording may not start immediately after z REC is
HQ
pressed. Rem 02:28
• You cannot change the recording mode during Prog. 1
recording or recording pause.
,continued 49 50

1-11
2 Press Z (open/close), and place a F “Mode”: Selects the recording mode
7:00 8:00 9:00 10:00 Notes
recordable disc on the disc tray. (page 47).
Programme 1 • To record a satellite programme, turn on the satellite
To use the Rec Mode Adjust function
tuner and select the satellite programme you want to
(page 52), select “AUTO.” record. Leave the satellite tuner turned on until the
Programme 2
G “PDC”: Sets the PDC function. See recorder finishes recording. If you connect equipment
with a timer function, you can use the Synchro Rec
“About the PDC function” (page 52). will be cut off
function (page 54).
• Even when correctly set, the programme may not be
• If you make a mistake, select the item and 7:00 8:00 9:00 10:00 recorded if another recording is underway, or other
Recording side facing down change the setting. prioritized timer setting overlaps.
Programme 1
3 Press Z to close the disc tray. 6 Press ENTER.
• Before the timer recording starts, “TIMER REC”
flashes in the front panel display.
The Timer List menu (page 55) appears. Programme 2
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front • The recorder automatically turns off when a timer
panel display. If timer settings overlap, a message appears. recording finishes.
will be cut off
Unused DVD-RWs are formatted in VR mode To change or cancel a timer recording, select • The recorder does not record programmes with Copy-
automatically. To format in Video mode, see “Edit” from the Timer List (page 55). Never signals. Such recordings stop after a few
To change or cancel timer recording

DVD Recording
seconds.
page 105. 7 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu. See “Changing or Cancelling DVD Timer Settings • The beginning of some recordings may not be made
4 Press TIMER. 8 Press )/1 (on/standby) to turn off the
(Timer List)” on page 55. when using the PDC function.

Timer – Standard 10:10 recorder. To use the Rec Mode Adjust function
The c indicator lights up in the front panel Recording TV programmes using the
No Rec To Date Start End Source Mode PDC Edit If the remainning disc space is not enough for the
No.1
01 DVD 04/15 09:00 10:00 PR 1 SP Off
display, and the recorder is ready to start current recording, the recorder automatically VIDEO Plus+ system
02Media
DVD 04/30
Date 09:15
Start 09:45
Stop PR 2
Prog. SPModeOff
PDC recording. adjusts the recording mode. Select “AUTO” for
03 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- --- If the c indicator flashes in the front panel The VIDEO Plus+ system is a feature that
DVD Today 10 : 10 10 : 15 Prog. 1 SP Off “Mode” when setting the timer. simplifies setting the timer. Just enter the
04 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
display, check that a recordable disc is
05 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
inserted and that there is enough disc space for PlusCode number listed in the TV programme
06 --- VIDEO
--/-- Plus+
--:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
About the PDC function guide. The date, time, and programme position of
the recording. PDC signals are transmitted with TV programmes that programme are set automatically.
in some broadcast systems. These signals ensure Check that the channels are correctly set in the
that timer recordings are made regardless of any “Tuner Preset” setup (page 98).
To stop recording broadcast delays, early starts, or broadcast
• If the Timer programming (VIDEO Plus+)
Press x twice. interruptions.
menu appears, press < to switch the )/1
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
display to “Standard.” DVD
recorder to stop recording.
◆To use the PDC function
5 Select an item using </, and adjust
Set “PDC” to “On” in step 5 above.
Number
buttons
using M/m. If timer settings overlap
The recorder starts scanning the channel before
The programme that starts first has priority and the CLEAR
A “Media”: Select “DVD.” second programme starts recording only after the
the timer recording starts.
B “Date”: Sets the date using M. first programme has finished. z Hints
If the programmes start at the same time, the SYSTEM MENU TIMER
To record the same programme every day • You can play the recorded programme by selecting the
or the same day every week, press m. programme listed first in the menu has priority. If programme title in the Title List menu (page 39). M/m/</,,
the end time of one setting and the start time of ENTER
The item changes as follows: • You can use the recorder after setting the timer. Just
Today y Sun~Sat (Sunday to Saturday) another timer setting is the same, the beginning of press )/1 to turn on the recorder. Turn off the recorder
y Mon~Sat (Monday to Saturday) y the programme that starts later will be cut. to return it to recording standby before the timer
recording starts.
Mon~Fri (Monday to Friday) y Sun
• When the start time and the programme position or
(every Sunday) y Mon (every Monday) input source to be recorded are the same but the x
y … y Sat (every Saturday) y “Media” setting differs, the programme is recorded to
1 month later y … y Today both the DVD disc and the VHS tape.
C “Start”: Sets the start time. • You can also turn on the timer programming menu
from the System Menu. Press SYSTEM MENU to
D “Stop”: Sets the stop time. select “Timer,” and select “Timer-Standard.”

E “Prog.”: Selects the programme

position or input source.

,continued 51 52

1 Press DVD to oparate the DVD recorder. The c indicator lights up in the front panel 4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the
2 Insert a recordable disc.
display, and the recorder is ready to start
recording.
Recording From Connected recording mode.
The display changes on the TV screen as
3 Press TIMER. If the c indicator flashes in the front panel Equipment With a Timer follows:
display, check that a recordable disc is
Timer – VIDEO Plus+ 10:10
inserted and that there is enough disc space for (Synchro Rec) HQ HSP SP LSP
Title List
the recording.
Timer
Set VIDEO Plus+ code number.[0~9] +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R SEP SLP EP LP
Edit
You can set the recorder to automatically record For details about the recording mode, see
To stop recording
Dubbing
programmes from connected equipment that has a page 47.
Press x twice.
Disc Setting
Standard Note that it may take a few seconds for the timer function (such as a satellite tuner). Connect
the equipment to the LINE 3/DECODER jack on
5 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is
Setup recorder to stop recording. in stop mode.
the rear of the recorder (page 28).
If the timer settings overlap When the connected equipment turns on, the 6 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.
recorder starts recording a programme from the
• If the Timer programming (Standard) menu 7
DVD Recording

See page 51. Select “Features,” and press ENTER.

appears, press < to switch the display to LINE 3/DECODER jack.
The “Features” setup appears.
“VIDEO Plus+.” To change or cancel timer recording
4 Press the number buttons to enter the See “Changing or Cancelling DVD Timer Settings 8 Select “Synchro Recording,” and press
(Timer List)” on page 55. ENTER.
PlusCode number. DVD
• If you make a mistake, press CLEAR and re- z Hints 9 Select “to DVD,” and press ENTER.
enter the correct number. • You can play the recorded programme by selecting the
10 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu.
5 Press ENTER.
programme title in the Title List menu.
• You can use the recorder after setting the timer. Just 11 Set the timer on the connected equipment
The date, start and stop times, programme press )/1 to turn on the recorder. Turn off the recorder
position, recording mode, PDC setting to the time you want to record, and turn it
to return it to recording standby before the timer SYSTEM
(page 52), etc. appear. recording starts. MENU off.
Timer – Standard 10:10
• When the start time and the programme position or
input source to be recorded are the same but the
M/m/</,,
ENTER
12 Press SYNCHRO REC.
No Rec To Date Start End Source Mode PDC Edit “Media” setting differs, the programme is recorded to The SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up on
No.1
01 DVD 04/15 09:00 10:00 PR 1 SP Off both the DVD disc and the VHS tape. the front panel and the recorder stands by for
02Media
DVD 04/30
Date 09:15
Start 09:45
Stop PR 2
Prog. SPModeOff
PDC • You can also turn on the timer programming menu Synchro-Rec.
03 ---
DVD
--/--
15/04
--:--
09 : 00
--:--
10 : 00
----
Prog. 1
---
SP
---
Off from the System Menu. Press SYSTEM MENU to The recorder starts recording when a signal is
04 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
select “Timer,” and select “Timer - VIDEO Plus+.” x received from the connected equipment.
05 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
When the connected equipment turns off, the
06 --- VIDEO
--/-- Plus+
--:-- --:-- ---- --- --- REC MODE
Notes SYNCHRO
recording stops and the recorder turns off.
• To record a satellite programme, turn on the satellite REC
tuner and select the satellite programme you want to
• If you want to change the setting, press </ record. Leave the satellite tuner turned on until the To stop recording
, to select the item and press M/m to
change the setting.
recorder finishes recording. If you connect equipment
with a timer function, you can use the Synchro Rec
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder. Press x twice.

6 Select “DVD” for “Media” and press

function (page 54).
• Even when correctly set, the programme may not be
2 Insert a recordable disc. To cancel Synchro Rec function
Press SYNCHRO REC before recording starts.
ENTER. recorded if another recording is underway, or other 3 Select the line input audio. The SYNCHRO REC indicator on the recorder
The Timer List menu (page 55) appears. prioritized timer setting overlaps. Set “Line Audio Input” to “Stereo” or
• Before the timer recording starts, “TIMER REC” turns off.
If timer settings overlap, a message appears. “Bilingual” in the “Audio” setup (page 104). If you press SYNCHRO REC during Synchro-
flashes in the front panel display.
To change or cancel a timer recording, select Rec, the recording stops, the SYNCHRO REC
• The recorder automatically turns off when a timer
“Edit” from the Timer List (page 55). recording finishes. indicator turns off, and the recorder turns off.
7 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu. • The recorder does not record programmes with Copy-
Never signals. Such recordings stop after a few
8 Press )/1 (on/standby) to turn off the seconds.
recorder. • The beginning of some recordings may not be made
when using the PDC function.

53 54

1-12
If the timer settings of a Synchro-Recording 4 Select the timer setting you want to change prioritized timer setting overlaps. For priority, see
and another timer recording overlap Changing or Cancelling DVD or cancel, and press ENTER. page 51.
• You cannot change the timer settings for a recording
Regardless of whether or not the programme is a The sub-menu appears.
Synchro-Rec programme, the programme that Timer Settings (Timer List) Timer List 10:10
currently underway.
• The Timer List displays both the DVD recorder and
starts first has priority. The recorder starts VCR timer settings.
recording the second programme about ten +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R No Media Date Start Stop Prog. Mode PDC Edit
Edit
seconds after the first programme has finished. If 01 DVD 15/04 09:00 10:00 Prog. 1 SP Off

the end time of one setting and the start time of You can change or cancel timer settings using the 02 DVD 30/04 09:15 09:45 Prog. 2 SP
Del
Off

another timer setting is the same, the beginning of Timer List menu. 03 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- --

04 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- --

the programme that starts later will be cut. 05 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- --

06 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- --

7:00 8:00 9:00 10:00

Programme 1
5 Select one of the options, and press
Programme 2 ENTER.

DVD Recording
“Edit”: Changes the timer setting.
will be cut off Select an item using </, and adjust using
SYSTEM
M/m. Press ENTER.
MENU
Timer – Standard 10:10
M/m/</,,
ENTER No Media
No.1
Date Start Stop Prog. Mode PDC Edit
01 DVD 04/15 09:00 10:00 Prog. 1 SP Off
Notes O RETURN
02Media
DVD 04/30
Date 09:15
Start 09:45
Stop Prog. 2
Prog. SPModeOff
PDC
• The recorder starts recording only after detecting the 03 ---
DVD
--/--
15/04
--:--
09 : 00
--:--
10 : 00
----
Prog. 1
---
SP
---
Off

video signal from the connected equipment. The 04 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---

beginning of the programme may not be recorded 05 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---

regardless of whether or not the recorder’s power is on 1 Press SYSTEM MENU. 06 --- VIDEO
--/-- Plus+
--:-- --:-- ---- --- ---

or off. The System Menu appears.

• To use the connected equipment during Synchro-Rec
standby, cancel the standby mode by pressing 2 Select “Timer,” and press ENTER. “Del”: Erases the timer setting.
Select “OK” and press ENTER when asked
SYNCHRO REC. To return to standby mode again, be
sure to turn off the equipment and press SYNCHRO
3 Select “Timer List,” and press ENTER. for confirmation.
REC, before Synchro-Rec starts. Timer List 10:10 Timer List 10:10
• The Synchro-Rec function does not work with some
No Media Date Start Stop Prog. Mode PDC Edit
tuners. For details, see the tuner’s operating No Media Date Start Stop Prog. Mode PDC Edit
01 DVD 15/04 09:00 10:00 Prog. 1 SP Off
instructions. 01 DVD 04/15 09:00 10:00 Prog. 1 SP Off
02 DVD 30/04 09:15 09:45 Prog. 2 SP Off
• During Synchro-Rec standby, the Auto Clock Set 02 DVD 04/30 09:15 09:45 Prog. 2 SP Off

03 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- -- Do you want to erase ‘No.1’?
function does not work (page 100) . 03 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---

04 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- -- 04 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
• After a recording has finished, the recorder enters the OK Cancel
05 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- -- 05 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
Synchro-Rec standby mode until the SYNCHRO REC
06 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- -- 06 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
indicator turns off.
• If Synchro-Rec starts with the recorder turned on, the
recorder will turn off when the recording ends. Timer information displays the recording
• The recorder does not record programmes with Copy- date, time, recording mode, etc. 6 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the Timer
Never signals. Such recordings stop after a few If there are more than six timer settings, press List.
seconds. If any settings remain, turn off the recorder to
m to display the next page.
return it to recording standby.

To return to the previous display

Press O RETURN.

Notes
• Even when correctly set, the programme may not be
recorded if another recording is underway, or other

,continued 55 56

4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the create and edit a Playlist (see below). The edit
Recording From Connected recording mode.
DVD Editing
functions available for original titles are:
– Renaming a title (page 63).
The display changes on the TV screen as
Equipment Without a Timer follows: – Erasing a title (page 59).

+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R

HQ HSP SP LSP Before Editing – Erasing a chapter (page 60).
– Setting protection against erasure (page 59).
SEP SLP EP LP – Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase) (page 60).
You can record from a connected VCR or similar This recorder offers various edit options for – Dividing a title (page 61).
device. For connection details, see “Connecting various disc types. Before you edit, check the disc
For details about the recording mode, see
Another VCR or Similar Device” on page 26. type in the front panel display, and select the To create and edit Playlist titles
page 47.
Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the option available for your disc (page 30). A Playlist is a group of Playlist titles created from
equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack). 5 Select the line input audio. the original title for editing purposes. When you
To record from a digital video camera connected Set “Line Audio Input” to “Stereo” or Note create a Playlist, only the control information
to the DV IN jack, see page 93. “Bilingual” in the “Audio” setup (page 104). You may lose the edited contents if you remove the disc necessary for playback, such as the playback
6 Insert the source tape into the connected or a timer recording starts while editing. order, is stored on the disc. Since the original titles
DVD Recording

equipment and set to playback pause. are left unaltered, Playlist titles can be re-edited.
Edit options for DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that
DVD 7 Press z REC on this recorder and the
(Video mode)/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs Playlist is also erased.
pause or play button on the connected
equipment at the same time. +RW -RWVideo +R -R Example: You have recorded the final few
Recording starts. matches of a soccer tournament on a DVD-RW
INPUT (VR mode). You want to create a digest with the
SELECT To stop recording, press x on this recorder. You can perform simple edits. Since Video mode
titles are actual recordings on the disc, you cannot goal scenes and other highlights, but you also want
undo any edits you make. The edit functions to keep the original recording.
Notes available for Video mode titles are:
• A video game image may not be recorded clearly. – Renaming a title (page 63).
• The recorder does not record programmes with Copy- – Erasing a title (page 59).
Never signals. Such recordings stop after a few – Setting protection against erasure (DVD+RWs
seconds. only) (page 59).
• During recording or recording pause, you cannot – Dividing a title (DVD+RWs only) (page 61).
x
change the recording mode.
z REC • You cannot change the programme position or input
REC MODE source during recording. Notes
• Once the disc is finalized, you cannot edit or record on In this case, you can compile highlight scenes as a
the disc (except for DVD+RWs). Playlist title. You can even rearrange the scene
• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s order within the Playlist title. See “Editing a
control information is full, erase unnecessary titles.
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.
Playlist” on page 65.
The advanced edit functions available for Playlist
2 Insert a recordable disc. Edit options for DVD-RWs (VR mode) titles are:
– Renaming a title (page 63).
3 Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select -RWVR
– Erasing a title (page 59).
an input source according to the – Erasing a chapter (page 60).
connection you made. You can enjoy advanced edit functions. First you – Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase) (page 60).
The front panel display changes as follows: have two options for a DVD-RW (VR mode): – Editing a Playlist scene (page 65).
editing either the original recording (called the – Dividing a title (page 61).
Programme position LINE1 LINE2 “original”), or the playback information created – Combining titles (page 66).
from the original (called a “Playlist”). Since each
DV LINE3 is different in nature and offers different merits, z Hint
read the following and select the one that better You can switch the Title List to show original or Playlist.
suits your needs. While the Title List menu is turned on, press ORIGINAL/
PLAYLIST repeatedly.
To edit original titles
Edits made to the original titles are final. If you
plan to retain an unaltered original recording,

57 58

1-13
 Notes
4 Select an option, and press ENTER. Chapter Erase (Original) 10:10

• You cannot protect Playlist titles. Editing a Title You can select from the following:
“Title Erase”: Erases the selected title. Select
Chapter 1 / 3 Title No.01

• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s Check

+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R

“OK” when asked for confirmation.
control information is full, erase unnecessary titles. Erase
“Chapter Erase”*1: Allows you to select a 01 00:00:34 02 00:00:10 03 00:04:20
Modify

This section explains the basic edit functions. Note chapter in the title and erase it (see below). Move
that editing is irreversible. To edit a DVD-RW “Protect”*2: Protects the title. Select “On”
Add
(VR mode) without changing the original when the Protection display appears. “ ”
recordings, create a Playlist title (page 64). appears for the protected title. To cancel the
protection, select “Off.” “ ” changes to
“ .”
“Title Name”: Allows you to rename the title
4 Select the chapter you want to erase, and
DVD (page 63). press ENTER.
“A-B Erase”*1: Erases a section of the title “Check” is selected. To preview the chapter,
(page 60). press ENTER. When playback finishes or
“Divide Title”*2: Divides a title into two when you press O RETURN, the display
(page 61). returns to “Chapter Erase (Original).”
ORIGINAL/
PLAYLIST 5 Select “Erase,” and press ENTER.

DVD Editing
*1DVD-RWs (VR mode) only
*2DVD+RWs and DVD-RWs (VR The display asks for confirmation.
TITLE LIST mode) only
M/m/</,,
ENTER
6 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
The selected chapter is erased from the title.
O RETURN z Hints To erase other chapters, repeat from step 4.
./> • You can also rename a disc (page 69).
H • For a DVD+R or DVD-R, erasing titles does not free up
disc space. For a DVD+RW or DVD-RW (Video z Hint
x
X mode), you can free up space only by erasing the last You can also erase chapters from a Playlist title
title. (page 65).

1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder. Notes Note

• When editing a DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD+R, or
2 Press TITLE LIST. DVD-R, finish all editing before finalizing the disc.
If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that Playlist
is also erased.
When editing a DVD-RW (VR mode), press You cannot edit a finalized disc.
ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST to switch to the • You cannot erase protected titles or erase chapters from
“Title List (Original),” if necessary. a protected title. Erasing a section of a title
• If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that (A-B Erase)
Playlist is also erased.
Title List (Original) 10:10
-RWVR
1/4 No. Title Length Edit

01 Prog. 1 01:29:03 > Erasing a chapter (Chapter Erase)

02 Prog. 2 00:31:23 > You can select a section (scene) within a title and
03 Prog. 4 01:59:00 > -RWVR erase it. Note that erasing scenes from original
04 Prog. 3 00:58:56 >
titles cannot be undone.
T Prog. 1 You can select a chapter within a title and erase it.
02.May.2005
08:00 Note that erasing chapters from original titles 1 Press TITLE LIST.
cannot be undone. Press ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST to switch to the
“Title List (Original),” if necessary.
3 Select a title, and press ENTER. 1 Press TITLE LIST.
2 Select a title, and press ENTER.
The sub-menu appears. Press ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST to switch to the
“Title List (Original),” if necessary. The sub-menu appears.

2 Select a title, and press ENTER. 3 Select “A-B Erase,” and press ENTER.
The sub-menu appears. The display for setting point A and B appears.

3 Select “Chapter Erase,” and press ENTER.

The display for erasing chapters appears.

,continued 59 60

“Start” is selected. • If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that 6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER. Press CHAPTER MARK at the point where you
Playlist is also erased. The display asks whether to use the same title want to divide the title into chapters.
A-B Erase 10:10
name as before. Each time you press the button, “Marking...”
Title No.01
Dividing a title into two (Divide Title) To use the same name, select “Yes” and press appears on the screen and the scenes before and
Start ENTER to finish. after the mark become separate chapters.
+RW -RWVR
Start 00:00:00 End 7 Select “No,” and press ENTER.
Erase
You can divide a title into two. Note that dividing The display asks whether to rename the title. VR Marking...
00:00:07
original titles cannot be undone.
T Title No.1
02.May.2005 08:00
End 00:00:00 Finish 8 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The “Title Name” display appears.
1 Press TITLE LIST.
9
4 Press ENTER at the start point of the When editing a DVD-RW(VR mode), press Follow steps 5 to 7 of “Changing the Name
section to be erased (point A). ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST to switch to the of a Title” (page 63) to complete
You can use H, , ./ “Title List (Original),” if necessary. renaming. To erase chapter marks
>, x, and X to find the point. The divided title appears in the Title List with
“End” is selected.
2 Select a title, and press ENTER. the new name.
You can combine two chapters by erasing the
chapter mark during playback.
The sub-menu appears.
During playback, press CHAPTER MARK
A-B Erase 10:10
3 Select “Divide Title,” and press ENTER. ERASE.
DVD Editing

Title No.01 z Hint

The display for setting the dividing point The current chapter combines with the previous
You can also divide a Playlist title (page 65).
Start appears. chapter.
“Point” is selected.
Start 00:00:10 End
Creating chapters manually
Erase
Notes
00:00:10 Divide Title (Original) 10:10
T Title No.1
+RW -RWVR • If a message appears and indicates that no more chapter
Finish Title No.01
02.May.2005 08:00
End 00:00:00
marks can be added, you may not be able to record or
Point You can manually insert a chapter mark at any edit.
• You cannot add or erase chapter marks on protected
5 Press ENTER at the end point of the section Start 00:00:00 Divide
point you like during playback.
titles or discs.
(point B).
00:00:07
“Erase” is selected. T Title No. 1
CHAPTER
To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or 02.May.2005 08:00
End 00:00:00

MARK ERASE
“End” and repeat from step 4 or 5. CHAPTER
6 Press ENTER. 4 Press ENTER at the point where you want to
MARK

The display asks for confirmation. divide the title.

7 Select “OK,” and press ENTER. You can use H,
>, x, and X to find the point.
, ./
The scene is erased.
To continue, repeat from step 4. To finish, “Divide” is selected.
select “Finish,” and press ENTER.
Divide Title (Original) 10:10

Title No.01

z Hints Point
• A chapter mark is inserted after the scene was erased.
The chapter mark divides the title into separate chapters Start 00:00:00 Divide

on either side of the mark.

00:00:10
• You can also erase a section of a Playlist title (page 65).
T Title No. 1
End 00:00:10
02.May.2005 08:00

Notes
• Images or sound may be momentarily interrupted at the
point where you erase a section of a title.
5 Press ENTER.
• Sections shorter than five seconds may not be erased. The display asks for confirmation.
• The start and end points of a title may be different from To reset the dividing point, select “No” and
what you have set. press ENTER, then repeat from step 4.
• The total playing time of the title does not change even
if a scene was erased.

,continued 61 62

1-14
 The selected character appears in the input Edit 10:10

Changing the Name of a row.

You can only enter characters and symbols
Creating a Playlist Title List Create Playlist

Title that are displayed.

-RWVR
Timer

Edit
Edit Playlist

+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R • To change the cursor position, select the Playlist titles allow you to edit without changing Dubbing

input row using M, and press </,. the original recordings (see “Edit options for
Disc Setting
You can enter a title name of up to 32 characters. • To erase a character, select either of the DVD-RWs (VR mode)” on page 58). You can
Setup
Since the displayed number of characters is following setting buttons and press ENTER. create a Playlist title by combining up to 99
limited, their appearance in menus such as Title “Backspace”: Erases the character to the left sections (scenes) from original titles.
of the cursor.
List may be different. When the display for
entering characters appears, follow the steps “Delete”: Erases the character at the cursor Note 4 Select “Create Playlist,” and press ENTER.
below. position. The display for creating a Playlist appears.
If you erase an original title used in a Playlist, that Playlist
“Clear”: Erases all the characters in the input is also erased. “Start” is selected.
row. Create Playlist 10:10

• To insert a space, move the cursor to the Scene No.01

DVD desired position, select “Space,” and press
ENTER. DVD Start

DVD Editing
• To insert a character, move the cursor to the Start 00:00:00 End

desired position, select the character and Make

00:00:07
ORIGINAL/
press ENTER. T Playlist No. 1
Finish
PLAYLIST
6 Repeat step 5 to enter the remaining ORIGINAL/
PLAYLIST
--.---.---- --:--
End 00:00:00

TITLE LIST characters. SYSTEM

M/m/</,, To return to the Title List without renaming TITLE LIST
ENTER the title, press O RETURN.
MENU
M/m/</,, 5 Press ENTER at the start point.
O RETURN ENTER You can use H, , ./
7 Select “Finish,” and press ENTER. >, x, and X to find the point.
./> “End” is selected.
H
Create Playlist 10:10
1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.
z Hint
You can also rename a disc (page 69). Follow steps 5 to X
x Scene No.01

2 Press TITLE LIST. 7 above when the “Disc Name” display appears.
Start

When editing a DVD-RW (VR mode), press End

Start 00:00:10
ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST to switch to the
Make
“Title List (Original),” if necessary. 00:00:10
T
3
Playlist No. 1
Finish
Select a title, and press ENTER. End 00:00:00

The sub-menu appears.

1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.
--.---.---- --:--

4 Select “Title Name,” and press ENTER.

2 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is
The “Title Name” display appears.
in stop mode. 6 Press ENTER at the end point.
“Make” is selected.
Cursor Input row Title List (Original) 10:10
To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or
Title List
Title Name 10:10
Press ENTER :
“End” and repeat step 5 or 6.
Timer
7
K_

A B C D E a b c d e 1 2 3 4 5 Edit
Press ENTER.
Title Menu for DVD Title List.
F G H I J f g h i j 6 7 8 9 0 The selected section is captured as a scene. To
Dubbing
K L M N O k l m n o - _ + = . continue, repeat from step 5.
P Q R S T p q r s t ~ ! @ # $
8
Disc Setting
U V W X Y u v w x y % ^ & ( )
Setup
When you finish capturing scenes, select
Z z
“Finish” and press ENTER.
Backspace Space Delete Clear Finish

Setting buttons Character palette 3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.

5 Select the character you want to enter
using M/m/</, and press ENTER.
63 64

Playing a Playlist title

4 Select “Edit Playlist,” and press ENTER. “Modify”: Allows you to change the start and
Editing a Playlist The “Playlist” Title List appears. end point of a scene (page 67).
1 Press TITLE LIST. Playlist 10:10
“Move”: Allows you to change scene order
(page 67).
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST to switch to the
-RWVR

You can edit Playlist titles or scenes within them,

1/2 No. Title

01 Prog. 1
Length

00:05:04 >
Edit
“Add”: Allows you to add other scenes before
“Playlist” Title List. 02 Prog. 2 00:00:51 > a selected scene (page 68).
without changing the actual recordings.
3 Select a Playlist title, and press ENTER.
The sub-menu appears. T Prog. 1 To return to the previous display
4 Select “Play,” and press ENTER. DVD
02.May.2005
03:25
Press O RETURN.

To turn off the display

Press SYSTEM MENU.
z Hint
When a Playlist title is created, the start and end points
5 Select a Playlist title, and press ENTER.
will become chapter marks, and each scene will become The sub-menu appears. z Hint
a chapter.
SYSTEM
6 Select an option, and press ENTER.
The Resume Play function will work for scene playback.

MENU Select from the following options. For details,

Notes M/m/</,, see the pages in parentheses. Combining two titles into one
DVD Editing

• The picture may pause when an edited scene is played.

O RETURN
ENTER (Combine Titles)
• The start and end points in a title may be different from “Title Erase”: Erases the title. Select “OK”
what you have set. ./> when asked for confirmation. -RWVR
H
“Chapter Erase”: Allows you to select
x chapters in the Playlist title to erase (page 60). You can select a Playlist title and combine it with
X “Title Name”: Allows you to rename the title another Playlist title.
(page 63).
“A-B Erase”: Allows you to select sections in
1 Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Editing a Playlist”
(page 65) to select a Playlist title.
the title to erase (page 60).
The sub-menu appears.
“Edit Scene”: Allows you to re-edit scenes in

1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder.

the Playlist title. Go to step 7. 2 Select “Combine Titles,” and press
“Divide Title”: Divides the title in two at a ENTER.
2 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is desired point (page 61).
“Combine Titles”: Allows you to combine
The next title below is also selected.
in stop mode. Playlist 10:10
two titles into one (page 66).
7
Title List (Original) 1/4 No. Title Length Edit
10:10

Title List
Select “Edit Scene,” and press ENTER. 01 Prog. 1 00:05:04 >
02 Prog. 3 00:00:51 >
Press ENTER : The display for editing scenes appears.
Timer 03 Prog. 2 01:59:00 >
Edit Scene 10:10 04 Prog. 4 00:58:56 >
Edit Title Menu for DVD Title List.
Scene No.1 / 3 Playlist No.01
T Prog. 1
Dubbing
Check 02.May.2005
03:25
Disc Setting
Erase
01 00:00:34 02 00:00:10 03 00:04:20
Setup Modify

3
Move

Add
Select a Playlist title to be combined.
3 Select “Edit,” and press ENTER. Playlist 10:10

Edit 1/4 No. Title Length Edit

10:10
01 Prog. 1 00:05:04 >
Title List Create Playlist
“Check”: Allows you to preview a scene. 02 Prog. 3 00:00:51 >
Timer Edit Playlist 03 Prog. 2 01:59:00 >
Starts playback of the selected scene when
04 Prog. 4 00:58:56 >
Edit you press ENTER. The display returns to the
“Edit Scene” display when the playback T Prog. 2
Dubbing
02.May.2005
Disc Setting
finishes or when you press O RETURN. 11:30

“Erase”: Erases a scene (page 67).

Setup

,continued 65 66

1-15
4 Press ENTER. “Start” is selected. 1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist” “Start” is selected.
The display asks for confirmation. (page 65). Add
Modify 10:10 10:10

5 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER. Scene No.01 2 Select a scene in the “Edit Scene” display Scene No.01

The display asks whether to use the same title and press ENTER. Start
name as before. Start

To use the same name, select “Yes” and press End

3 Select “Move,” and press ENTER. Start 00:00:00 End
Start 00:00:00
ENTER to finish. Edit Scene 10:10 00:00:07
Add

6 Select “No,” and press ENTER.

T Playlist No. 1
00:00:07
Change
Scene No. 2 / 3 Playlist No.01

Check
T Playlist No. 1
02.May.2005 03:25
End 00:00:00 Cancel

Cancel
The display appears to confirm to rename the 02.May.2005 03:25
End 00:00:00
Erase
title.
01 00:00:34 02 00:00:10 03 00:04:20
4 Press ENTER at the start point.
7
Modify

Select “Yes,” and press ENTER. 4 Press ENTER at the start point. Move You can use H, , ./
The “Title Name” display appears. You can use H, , ./ Add >, x, and X to find the point.
8 Follow steps 5 to 7 of “Changing the Name >, x, and X to find the point.
“End” is selected.
“End” is selected.
of a Title” (page 63) to complete Add 10:10

renaming.
The two Playlist titles become one Playlist
Modify 10:10
4 Select a new location using </,, and Scene No.01

DVD Editing
Scene No.01
press ENTER. Start
title with the new name.
Start
The selected scene moves to the new location. End
Start 00:00:10
To move other scenes, repeat from step 2.
Erasing a scene (Erase) Start 00:00:10 End 00:00:10
Add
Edit Scene 10:10
T Playlist No. 1
Cancel
End 00:00:00
-RWVR 00:00:10
Change Scene No. 3 / 3 Playlist No.01 02.May.2005 03:25

T Playlist No. 1
Cancel
Check

5
End 00:00:00
You can erase a selected scene. 02.May.2005 03:25 Erase
Press ENTER at the end point.
1
01 00:00:34 02 00:04:20 03 00:00:10
Modify
Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist” “Add” is selected.
(page 65). 5 Press ENTER at the end point. Move

Add
To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or
“Change” is selected. “End” and repeat step 4 or 5.
2 Select a scene in the “Edit Scene” display To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or
6 Press ENTER.
and press ENTER. “End” and repeat step 4 or 5.
The display returns to the “Edit Scene”
3 Select “Erase,” and press ENTER. 6 Press ENTER. display.
The display asks for confirmation. The display returns to the “Edit Scene” Adding a scene (Add) The selected section is added before the
display. selected scene.
4 Select “OK,” and press ENTER. The re-selected section is captured as a scene. -RWVR
To add other scenes, repeat from step 2.
The selected scene is erased. To modify other scenes, repeat from step 2.
To erase other scenes, repeat from step 2. You can add a scene before the selected scene.
To cancel adding
Modifying a scene (Modify) To cancel modifying
1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist” Select “Cancel,” and press ENTER.
(page 65).
Select “Cancel,” and press ENTER.
-RWVR
2 Select a scene in the “Edit Scene” display, Note
Note and press ENTER. The start and end point of a scene may be different from
You can change the start and end point of the what you have set.
selected scene.
The start and end point of a scene may be different from
what you have set.
3 Select “Add,” and press ENTER.
1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Editing a Playlist”
(page 65). Moving a scene (Move)
2 Select a scene in the “Edit Scene” display -RWVR
and press ENTER.
3 Select “Modify,” and press ENTER. You can change the scene order within the Playlist
title.

,continued 67 68

C “Disc Format” (DVD+RWs/DVD- To turn off the power while rewinding (Rewind
Formatting/Renaming/ RWs only): Erases all contents of the
VCR Playback
Shut Off)
disc, including protected titles, and Press "/1 while the tape is rewinding. The power
Protecting a Disc makes a blank disc. will turn off but the tape will keep rewinding until

+RW +R -R
For DVD-RWs, select a recording Playing it reaches the end.
-RWVR -RWVideo
format (“VR Mode” or “Video Mode”)
To use the time counter
The “Disc Setting” display allows you to check the according to your needs.
Press CLEAR at the point where you want to find
disc information or change the disc name. D “Disc Finalize”: Finalizes a disc. See later. The counter in the front panel display resets
Depending on the disc type, you can also format or page 91 for details. to “0:00:00.”
set protection. Z "/1 To search for the 0:00:00 point automatically, see
E “Disc Information”: Displays the VIDEO
page 73.
following information. To display the counter on the TV screen, press
TRACKING +/–
DVD • Disc name DISPLAY.
• Disc type (and recording format for a
CLEAR
DVD-RW)
Notes
• Total number of titles
• Protect setting DISPLAY • During playback, the VCR automatically detects the
recording system and the recording mode, SP
DVD Editing

• The oldest and most recent recording

(Standard Play) or LP (Long Play), from the tape. EP
date (Extended Play) mode recordings made on other
SYSTEM
MENU • The total available recording time in equipment will play, but picture quality is not
M/m/</,, each recording mode. guaranteed.
ENTER • The counter resets to “0:00:00” whenever a tape is
O RETURN Disc Information 10:10 reinserted.
H
Disc Name Disc 1 x • The counter stops counting when it comes to a portion
Media DVD-RW Format VR Mode
with no recording.
• When playback does not start even if you insert a tape
Title No. Original 6 / Playlist 1

1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder. Protected Not Protected

with its safety tab removed, set “VCR Function” –

2 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is

Date 5.04.2005 ~ 30.04.2005 1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.
“Auto Play” to “On” in the “Features” setup
(page 105).
in stop mode.
Remainder HQ : 0H 57M
LSP : 2H 23M
HSP : 1H 26M
LP : 2H 52M
SP : 1H 55M
EP : 3H 50M 2 Insert a tape. • If you switch to the VCR while playing a disc, DVD
playback stops.
SLP : 5H 46M SEP : 7H 40M 4.4/4.7GB
Playback starts automatically if you insert a
3 Select “Disc Setting,” and press ENTER. tape with its safety tab removed.
• If you play back a tape in LP or EP mode with the
NTSC system, the sound becomes monaural.
The “Disc Setting” display appears. F “Erase All Titles” (DVD+RWs/DVD- • For simultaneous VHS and DVD operation, see page 9.
Disc Setting 10:10 RWs only): Erases all titles on the disc
Title List Disc Name : (except protected titles). Select “OK”
Timer Disc Protect : Not Protected when asked for confirmation.
Edit
Disc Format
Disc Finalize
: VR Mode
: Unfinalized
For DVD-RWs (VR mode), Playlists 3 Press H (play).
Dubbing
created with protected titles are also The front panel display shows the playing
Disc Information
Disc Setting Erase All Titles
erased. time.
Setup
When the tape reaches the end, it will rewind
automatically.
To return to the previous display
Press O RETURN.
4 Select an option, and press ENTER. To stop playback
A “Disc Name”: Allows you to rename a z Hints Press x (stop).
• You can set protection for individual titles (page 59).
disc. For details on how to enter • By reformatting, you can change the recording format
characters, see page 63. To eject the tape
on DVD-RWs, or record again on DVD-RWs (Video
mode) that have been finalized. Press Z (eject).
B “Disc Protect” (DVD-RWs (VR mode)
only): Protects all titles on the disc
when “Protected” is selected. To cancel Note
the protection, select “Not Protected.” You can label a disc using up to 32 characters; however,
the name may not display on other DVD equipment.

69 70

1-16
Adjusting the picture (tracking)
Playback Options
You can manually adjust tracking if the recording
quality is too poor to be remedied by the VCR’s
automatic tracking (a tracking meter appears
during the automatic tracking).

Press TRACKING +/–.

The tracking meter appears.
Press TRACKING +/– repeatedly until the
distortion disappears.

/ >
. H

Tracking X

VCR Playback
Tracking meter

Button Operation
To resume automatic tracking
Press TRACKING + and TRACKING – on the • Fast reverses or fast forwards when pressed during stop mode.
recorder at the same time for more than ten (fast reverse/fast When you hold down during fast reverse or fast forward, you can view the picture.
seconds. Or, eject the tape and reinsert it. forward) • Plays at high speed when briefly pressed during playback.
When you hold down the button during playback, the high-speed play continues until
you release the button.

Plays in slow motion when pressed in pause mode.

(slow)

(advance) • Advances one frame for each press in pause mode.

• Fast forwards the current scene for 30 seconds when pressed during playback.*1

(replay) Replays the previous scene when pressed during playback.*2

./> Press during playback. Playback speed changes with each press:
(previous/next) –×7 y –×5 y –×3 y STILL y SLOW y PLAY y ×2 y ×3 y ×5 y ×7

X (pause) Pauses playback.

If you pause playback for more than five minutes, playback starts automatically.
*1
Can be pressed up to four times to forward about
two minutes. Notes
*2 For 10 seconds in SP or LP mode/for 15 seconds in • The sound is muted during playback at various speeds.
EP mode. • The picture may show noise during high-speed reverse
play.
To resume normal playback, press H.

71 72

Viewing information on the front

Searching Using Various Go to Zero
Displaying the Playing Time panel display
Functions 0:00:00 and Play Information You can view the information on the front panel
display.

The VCR automatically marks the tape with an You can check playback information, such as
index signal at the point where each recording “End Search”: Searches for the beginning of a elapsed or remaining time, recording mode, etc., Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly.
begins. blank space. If no blank space is found, the on the TV screen. The displays differ depending on the status.
You can easily find a specific point using various tape will reach the end.
search functions. Example: When playing a tape
Elapsed time
Note End search

During DVD recording, you cannot use VCR search 0:00:13

functions.

Remaining tape length

DISPLAY TIME/TEXT
“Forward Intro Scan”/“Reverse Intro Scan”:
VIDEO Searches for an index mark and plays back for
about five seconds at that point.
VCR Playback

Press H (play) to view that programme. If Clock

you do not press H, the VCR automatically
CLEAR
searches for the next index mark, or until it
reaches the end of the tape. Press DISPLAY during playback.
The information display appears. Example: When a tape is in stop mode
Clock
M/m/</,, Each time you press the button, the display m
Scan and play
ENTER changes as follows: Elapsed time
–0:00:01
TOOLS m
Tape and disc information/Date and time Remaining tape length
m m
H Tape information only Programme position or input source
m
No display

1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR. Notes

• The VCR may not recognize the end of a blank space
2 Press TOOLS. depending on its length. Stop Play
• No index signal is marked if you pause a recording and
3 Select a search method from the TOOLS then keep recording the same programme. To mark an
1:23:45
HQ
0:30:00
SP
menu, and press ENTER. index, press x or change the programme position once Rem 16:15 Rem 01:30

during recording pause. Original Prog. 1

Go To Zero Mon 02 May. 2005 10:10

End Search

Forward Intro Scan A Playing status

Reverse Intro Scan

Move ENTER Enter

B Time counter (elapsed time)
C Recording mode
D Remaining tape length
“Go To Zero”: Searches for the 0:00:00 point E Programme position or input source
on the tape counter. F Date and time
To reset the counter to 0:00:00, press CLEAR.

73 74

1-17
 How sound is recorded on a video tape
Notes
Selecting the Sound During The VCR records sound onto two separate tracks.
Hi-fi audio is recorded onto the main track along VCR Recording • Tapes recorded in LP (×2) mode by this VCR cannot be
Playback with the picture. Monaural sound is recorded onto
played back on VHS video decks with SP mode only.
• Noise may appear in the image when tapes recorded in
the normal audio track along the edge of the tape. Before Recording LP mode by this VCR are played back on other VHS
video decks with LP mode.
Monaural sound
Normal audio track
Before you start recording…
• This VCR records in VHS format. Recording stereo and bilingual
Hi-fi audio track • Check that the tape is longer than the recording programmes
(main track) time (page 74).
The recorder automatically receives and records
Stereo sound
(left/right channels) Notes stereo and bilingual programmes based on the
NICAM system.
• Timer recordings cannot be made if the recorder is
You can switch between main and sub sounds
turned on (page 79). The recorder automatically turns
Notes off after a recording has finished. while playing a tape (page 75).
• To play a tape in stereo, you must use the A/V • This recorder shares a single tuner for both the DVD
connections. recorder and the VCR. You cannot record different NICAM system
• When you play a tape recorded in monaural, the sound programs to a DVD and a VHS tape at the same time. When a stereo or bilingual NICAM based
Press (audio) repeatedly during is heard in monaural regardless of the (audio) • This recorder has the copy guard function. Programmes programme is received, “STEREO” and
playback. setting. that contain a Copy-Never copy guard signal cannot be “NICAM” appear in the front panel display.
correctly recorded on the VCR. To record a NICAM programme, be sure to set

VCR Playback
“Manual Set” – “Tuner Audio” to “NICAM”
To listen to On-screen Front panel To save a recording
display display (default) in the “Tuner Preset” setup (page 98). If
To prevent accidental erasure, break off the safety the sound is not clear when listening to NICAM
tab as illustrated. To record on the tape again, broadcasts, select “Standard.”
Stereo Hi-Fi STEREO
cover the tab hole with adhesive tape.
Left channel Left STEREO z Hint
You can select the audio (main or sub) while recording
Right channel Right STEREO bilingual programmes using the (audio) button.
This does not affect the recorded sound.
Left and right Mix STEREO
channels Safety tab
mixed

Monaural Mono STEREO*

sound on the Recording mode
normal audio “LP” (Long Play) or “SP” (Standard Play) is
track
available for recording mode (tape speed). “LP”
provides recording time two times as long as “SP.”
* No indicator appears on the front panel display when
However, “SP” produces better picture and audio
you play a tape without Hi-fi recording.
quality.

Maximum recording time

Tape Length SP LP
E180 3 hrs 6 hrs
E240 4 hrs 8 hrs
E260 4 hrs 20 mins 8 hrs 40 mins
E300 5 hrs 10 hrs

75 76

To stop recording “c” and “OTR” light up, and the remaining
Notes
VCR Recording Without the Press x. recording time appears in the front panel
display. • The remaining tape length may not be indicated
Timer To pause recording When the counter reaches “0:00,” the recorder accurately for short tapes such as E-20 or E-30, or tapes
recorded in EP mode.
Press X. stops recording and turns off.
• After DISPLAY is pressed, it may take one minute for
To restart recording, press X again. the remaining tape length to appear.
If you pause recording for more than five minutes,
recording stops automatically. To cancel the Quick Timer
TV/DVD·VIDEO Press z REC repeatedly until the counter appears
switch
To watch another TV programme while in the front panel display. The recorder returns to
DVD VIDEO recording normal recording mode.
PROG +/– 1 Slide the TV/DVD·VIDEO switch to TV. To stop recording
INPUT 2 Press t TV/VIDEO to set the TV to the TV Press x twice.
SELECT input.
t TV/VIDEO
DISPLAY
3 Select another programme position on the TV. Checking the remaining tape length
To watch a DVD while recording You can check the recording information, such as
remaining tape length or recording mode, etc.
Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder, insert a
disc, and press H. Press DISPLAY while recording.
The information display appears.
H z Hints Press the button repeatedly to change the display
• To select a programme position, you can use the
x (page 74).
number buttons. Enter the programme position
VCR Recording

X number, and press ENTER.

z REC
• You can select a video source from the LINE jack using
REC MODE
the INPUT SELECT button. Record
• Tape information displayed on the TV screen will not 0:30:00

be recorded on the tape. SP

• You can turn off the TV during recording. If you are Rem 01:30
Prog. 1
using a satellite or digital tuner, make sure to leave it
1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR. on.

2 Insert a tape with its safety tab in place. Notes

A Recording status
• You cannot change the recording mode, programme B Time counter
position, or input source while recording. C Recording mode
• If you insert a tape with its safety tab removed, the tape
is ejected when you press z REC. D Remaining tape length
3 Press PROG +/– or INPUT SELECT E Current programme position
repeatedly to select the programme Recording using the Quick Timer
position or input source you want to (One-touch Timer Recording) To check the remaining tape length, set “VCR
Function” – “Tape Length” in the “Features” setup
record.
You can set the recorder to record in 30-minute correctly (page 105).
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the increments.
recording mode, “SP” or “LP.” 1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR. z Hint
For details about the recording mode, see
page 76. 2 Press z REC repeatedly to set the You can view the information also in the front panel
display. Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly to change the
duration.
5 Press z REC.
Each press advances the time in 30 minute up
display. Note that TIME/TEXT does not work during
One-touch Timer Recording.
“REC” appears in the front panel display, and to six hours.
recording starts.
(Normal
0:30 1:00 5:30 6:00 recording)

,continued 77 78

1-18
 2 Insert a tape with its safety tab in place. The Timer List menu (page 84) appears. “Tape Length” in the “Features” setup
VCR Timer Recording If timer settings overlap, a message appears.
To change or cancel a timer recording, select
(page 105)).
Note that some noise will appear on the image
(Standard/VIDEO Plus+) “Edit” from the Timer List (page 84). when the recording mode is changed. If you want
6 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu.
to keep the recording mode, select “SP” or “LP”
for “Mode.”
You can set the timer for a total of 12 programmes 3 Press TIMER. 7 Press )/1 (on/standby) to turn off the
recorder About the PDC function
together with DVD and VCR timer recording, up PDC signals are transmitted with TV programmes
to one month in advance.
Timer – Standard 10:10 The c indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the recorder is ready to start in some broadcast systems. These signals ensure
There are two methods to set the timer: the No Rec To
No.1
Date Start End Source Mode PDC Edit
that timer recordings are made regardless of any
standard method and VIDEO Plus+ method. 01 DVD 04/15 09:00 10:00 PR 1 SP Off recording.
02Media
DVD 04/30 09:15 09:45 PR 2 SPModeOff If the c indicator flashes in the front panel broadcast delays, early starts, or broadcast
• Standard: Set the date, time, and programme Date Start Stop Prog. PDC
interruptions.
position of the programme manually.
03 ---
DVD
--/--
Today
--:--
10 : 10
--:--
10 : 15
----
Prog. 1
---
SP
---
Off display, check that a tape with its safety tab in
• VIDEO Plus+: Enter the PlusCode number
04 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
place is inserted.
05 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---

designated for each TV programme (page 81). 06 --- VIDEO

--/-- Plus+
--:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
◆To use the PDC function
Set “PDC” to “On” in step 4 above.
To stop recording The recorder starts scanning the channel before
Note
Press x twice. the timer recording starts.
The recorder must be in standby mode for the timer
recording to be made. • If the Timer programming (VIDEO Plus+)
menu appears, press < to switch the If timer settings overlap z Hints
The programme that starts first has priority and the • You can use the recorder after setting the timer. Just
display to “Standard.”
Setting the timer manually second programme starts recording only after the press )/1 to turn on the recorder. Turn off the recorder

(Standard) 4 Select an item using </, and adjust first programme has finished. If the programmes
to return it to recording standby before the timer
recording starts.
using M/m. start at the same time, the programme listed first in

VCR Recording
• When the start time and the programme position or
A “Media”: Select “VCR.” the menu has priority. If the end time of one input source to be recorded are the same but the
)/1 setting and the start time of another timer setting is “Media” setting differs, the programme is recorded to
B “Date”: Sets the date using M. the same, the beginning of the programme that both the DVD disc and the VHS tape.
VIDEO To record the same programme every day starts later will be cut. • You can also turn on the timer programming menu
or the same day every week, press m. from the System Menu. Press SYSTEM MENU to
7:00 8:00 9:00 10:00 select “Timer,” and select “Timer-Standard.”
The item changes as follows:
Today y Sun~Sat (Sunday to Saturday) Programme 1
y Mon~Sat (Monday to Saturday) y Notes
Mon~Fri (Monday to Friday) y Sun Programme 2 • To record a satellite programme, turn on the satellite
SYSTEM TIMER (every Sunday) y Mon (every Monday) tuner and select the satellite programme you want to
MENU y … y Sat (every Saturday) y will be cut off record. Leave the satellite tuner turned on until the
M/m/</,, 1 month later y … y Today recorder finishes recording. If you connect equipment
ENTER 7:00 8:00 9:00 10:00 with a timer function, you can use the Synchro Rec
C “Start”: Sets the start time. function (page 82).
Programme 1
• Even when correctly set, the programme may not be
D “Stop”: Sets the stop time.
recorded if another recording is underway, or other
Programme 2
E “Prog.”: Selects the programme prioritized timer setting overlaps.
x • You cannot record on a tape with its safety tab
position or input source. will be cut off removed.
F “Mode”: Selects the recording mode; • Before the timer recording starts, “TIMER REC”
“SP” or “LP.” To use the Rec Mode To change or cancel timer recording flashes in the front panel display.
See “Changing or Cancelling VCR Timer Settings • The recorder automatically turns off when a timer
Adjust function (page 80), select
recording finishes.
“AUTO.” (Timer List)” on page 84.
• The beginning of some recordings may not be made
1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR. G “PDC”: Sets the PDC function. See To use the Rec Mode Adjust function
when using the PDC function.
“About the PDC function” (page 80). If the remaining tape length is too short for the
current recording, the VCR automatically changes
• If you make a mistake, select the item and the recording mode from SP to LP.
change the setting. When setting the timer, select “AUTO” in
5 Press ENTER. “Mode,” and check that the “Tape Length” setting
is correct for the inserted tape (“VCR Function” -
,continued 79 80

The date, start and stop times, programme z Hints

Recording TV programmes using the
VIDEO Plus+ system
position, recording mode, PDC setting
(page 80), etc. appear.
• You can use the recorder after setting the timer. Just
press )/1 to turn on the recorder. Turn off the recorder Recording From Connected
The VIDEO Plus+ system is a feature that
to return it to recording standby before the timer
recording starts.
Equipment With a Timer
Timer – Standard 10:10
simplifies setting the timer. Just enter the
No Media Date Start Stop Prog. Mode PDC Edit
• When the start time and the programme position or
input source to be recorded are the same but the
(Synchro Rec)
PlusCode number listed in the TV programme No.1
01 VCR 04/15 09:00 10:00 Prog. 1 SP Off “Media” setting differs, the programme is recorded to
guide. The date, time, and programme position of 02Media
VCR 04/30
Date 09:15
Start 09:45
Stop Prog. 2
Prog. SPModeOff
PDC both the DVD disc and the VHS tape.
that programme are set automatically. 03 ---
VCR
--/--
15/04
--:--
09 : 00
--:--
10 : 00
----
Prog. 1
---
SP
---
Off • You can also turn on the timer programming menu
Check that the channels are correctly set in the 04 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
from the System Menu. Press SYSTEM MENU to You can set the recorder to automatically record
“Tuner Preset” setup (page 98). 05 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
select “Timer,” and select “Timer - VIDEO Plus+.” programmes from connected equipment that has a
06 --- VIDEO
--/-- Plus+
--:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
timer function (such as a satellite tuner). Connect
Notes the equipment to the LINE 3/DECODER jack on
)/1
the rear of the recorder (page 28).
• To record a satellite programme, turn on the satellite
VIDEO • If you want to change the setting, press </ When the connected equipment turns on, the
tuner and select the satellite programme you want to
Number , to select the item and press M/m to record. Leave the satellite tuner turned on until the recorder starts recording a programme from the
buttons change the setting. recorder finishes recording. If you connect equipment LINE 3/DECODER jack.
with a timer function, you can use the Synchro Rec
CLEAR To re-enter the PlusCode number, press function.
CLEAR. • Even when correctly set, the programme may not be
recorded if another recording is underway, or other VIDEO
SYSTEM
MENU
TIMER 6 Select “VCR” for “Media,” and press prioritized timer setting overlaps.
ENTER. • Before the timer recording starts, “TIMER REC”
M/m/</,,
The Timer List menu (page 84) appears. flashes in the front panel display.
ENTER
If timer settings overlap, the message appears. • The recorder automatically turns off when a timer
VCR Recording

To change or cancel a timer recording, select recording finishes.

“Edit” from the Timer List (page 84). SYSTEM
x 7 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu.
MENU
M/m/</,,
8 Press )/1 (on/standby) to turn off the ENTER

recorder.
1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.
The c indicator lights up in the front panel
2 Insert a tape with its safety tab in place. display, and the recorder is ready to start
recording. x
3 Press TIMER. If the c indicator flashes in the front panel
REC MODE
display, check that a tape with its safety tab in
Timer – VIDEO Plus+ 10:10 SYNCHRO
place is inserted. REC
Title List

Set VIDEO Plus+ code number.[0~9]

Timer

To stop recording
Edit

Press x twice.
1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.
Dubbing

Disc Setting
2 Insert a tape with its safety tab in place.
If timer settings overlap
3
Standard

Setup
See page 80. Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the
recording mode, “SP” or “LP.”
• If the Timer programming (Standard) menu To change or cancel timer recording
See “Changing or Cancelling VCR Timer Settings
4 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is
appears, press < to switch the display to in stop mode.
“VIDEO Plus+.” (Timer List)” on page 84.
5 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.
4 Press the number buttons to enter the
PlusCode number. 6 Select “Features,” and press ENTER.
• If you make a mistake, press CLEAR and re- The “Features” setup appears.
enter the correct number. 7 Select “Synchro Recording,” and press
5 Press ENTER. ENTER.
,continued 81 82

1-19
8 Select “to Video,” and press ENTER. Notes
The sub-menu appears.
9 Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the menu. • The recorder starts recording only after detecting the Changing or Cancelling VCR Timer List 10:10

10 Set the timer on the connected equipment video signal from the connected equipment. The
beginning of the programme may not be recorded
Timer Settings (Timer List) No Media
01 VCR
Date
15/04
Start
09:00
Stop
10:00
Prog.
Prog. 1
Mode PDC Edit
SP Edit
Off
to the time of the programme you want to regardless of whether or not the recorder’s power is on 02 VCR 30/04 09:15 09:45 Prog. 2 SP
Del
Off

record, and turn it off. or off. 03 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- --

• To use the connected equipment during Synchro-Rec

11 Press SYNCHRO REC. standby, cancel the standby mode by pressing You can change or cancel timer settings using the
04

05
---

---
--/--

--/--
--:--

--:--
--:--

--:--
----

----
---

---
--

--

The SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up on SYNCHRO REC. To return to standby mode again, be Timer List menu. 06 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- --

the front panel and the recorder stands by for sure to turn off the equipment and press SYNCHRO
Synchro-Rec. REC, before Synchro-Rec starts.
The recorder starts recording when a signal is • The Synchro-Rec function does not work with some
tuners. For details, see the tuner’s operating
5 Select one of the options, and press
received from the connected equipment.
instructions.
ENTER.
When the connected equipment turns off, the • During Synchro-Rec standby, the Auto Clock Set “Edit”: Changes the timer setting.
recording stops and the recorder turns off. function (page 100) does not work. Select an item using </, and adjust using
• After a recording has finished, the recorder enters the M/m. Press ENTER.
Synchro-Rec standby mode until the SYNCHRO REC
To stop recording indicator turns off. Timer – Standard 10:10

Press x twice. • You cannot record on a tape with its safety tab SYSTEM No Media Date Start Stop Prog. Mode PDC Edit
No.1
removed. MENU 01 VCR 04/15 09:00 10:00 Prog. 1 SP Off

• If Synchro-Rec starts with the recorder turned on, the M/m/</,,

To cancel Synchro Rec function ENTER
02Media
VCR 04/30
Date 09:15
Start 09:45
Stop Prog. 2
Prog. SPModeOff
PDC
recorder will turn off when the recording ends. 03 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
Press SYNCHRO REC before recording starts. O RETURN
VCR 15/04 09 : 00 10 : 00 Prog. 1 SP Off
04 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
The SYNCHRO REC indicator on the recorder 05 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---
turns off.

VCR Recording
06 --- VIDEO
--/-- Plus+
--:-- --:-- ---- --- ---

If you press SYNCHRO REC during Synchro-

Rec, the recording stops, the SYNCHRO REC
indicator turns off, and the recorder turns off.
1 Press SYSTEM MENU. “Del”: Erases the timer setting.
The System Menu appears. Select “OK” and press ENTER when asked
If the timer settings of a Synchro-Rec and 2 Select “Timer,” and press ENTER.
for confirmation.
another timer recording overlap
Regardless of whether or not the programme is a
3 Select “Timer List,” and press ENTER.
Timer List 10:10

No Media Date Start Stop Prog. Mode PDC Edit

Synchro-Rec programme, the programme that Timer List 10:10 01 VCR 04/15 09:00 10:00 Prog. 1 SP Off

starts first has priority. The recorder starts 02 VCR 04/30 09:15 09:45 Prog. 2 SP Off
No Media Date Start Stop Prog. Mode PDC Edit
recording the second programme about ten 01 VCR 15/04 09:00 10:00 Prog. 1 SP Off
03 --- --/--
Do you want to erase ‘No.1’?
--:-- --:-- ---- --- ---

seconds after the first programme has finished. If 02 VCR 30/04 09:15 09:45 Prog. 2 SP Off
04 --- --/-- --:--
OK
--:-- ----
Cancel
--- ---

the end time of one setting and the start time of 03 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- --
05 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---

06 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- ---

another timer setting is the same, the beginning of 04 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- --

the programme that starts later will be cut. 05 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- --

6
06 --- --/-- --:-- --:-- ---- --- --

Press SYSTEM MENU to turn off the Timer

7:00 8:00 9:00 10:00
List.
Programme 1 Timer information displays the recording
date, time, recording mode, etc. If any settings remain, turn off the recorder to
If there are more than six timer settings, press return it to recording standby.
Programme 2
m to display the next page.
will be cut off
4 Select the timer setting you want to change To return to the previous display
or cancel, and press ENTER. Press O RETURN.

Notes
• Even when correctly set, the programme may not be
recorded if another recording is underway, or other
prioritized timer setting overlaps. For priority, see
page 80.

83 84

• You cannot change the timer settings for a recording 6 Press z REC on this recorder and the
currently underway.
• The Timer List displays both the DVD recorder and Recording From Connected pause or play button on the connected
equipment at the same time.
VCR timer settings.
Equipment Without a Timer Recording starts.
To stop recording, press x on this recorder.

You can record from a connected VCR or similar

Notes
device. For connection details, see “Connecting
Another VCR or Similar Device” on page 26. • A video game image may not be recorded clearly.
• You cannot record on a tape with its safety tab
removed.
• During recording or recording pause, you cannot
change the recording mode.
VIDEO
• You cannot change the recording mode, programme
position, or input source while recording.

INPUT
SELECT
VCR Recording

x
z REC
REC MODE

1 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR.

2 Insert a tape with its safety tab in place.
3 Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select
an input source according to the
connection you made.
The front panel display changes as follows:
Programme
position LINE1 LINE2

LINE3
4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the
recording mode, “SP” or “LP.”
5 Insert the source tape into the connected
equipment and set to playback pause.

,continued 85 86

1-20
 2 Insert a source VHS tape.
Notes
Dubbing (TAPE y DVD) 3 Press VIDEO to operate the VCR. • Dubbing cannot be made when: Dubbing From a DVD to a
4 Start playing the VHS tape, and then press
– using a non-recordable DVD.
– using VHS software with copy guard functions.
VHS Tape
Dubbing From a VHS Tape to x (stop) or X (pause) at the point where • Dubbing stops when:
you want to start dubbing. – the VHS tape reaches the end and stops. +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R DVD
a DVD To select VCR sound, press (audio) – the VHS video deck or the DVD deck is stopped.
during playback (see page 75). – the disc remaining time runs out.
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R • The System Menu, TOOLS menu, and information
5 Press T VIDEO on the recorder. display are not displayed during dubbing.
You can record (dub) a DVD title to a VHS tape.
Note that when you record copy-protected
You can easily record (dub) a VHS tape to a disc. Dubbing starts. • Copyrights
– Recordings made from VHS tapes and other software to a tape, picture may appear disrupted
Before dubbing, make the necessary audio settings
copyrighted material are solely for individual when you play back the tape.
on the VCR.
enjoyment, and other unauthorized use is prohibited You can also select titles or scenes and dub them
◆How titles and chapters are created To stop dubbing under copyright law. all at once. See “Dubbing selected titles and scenes
The recorder takes each recording on the VHS tape Press x. – Unauthorized editing of copyrighted material is (Programme Dubbing)” on page 89.
and automatically divides them into titles as they Note that it may take a few seconds for the prohibited under copyright law. Before dubbing, make the necessary audio settings
are dubbed to a disc. These titles are then further recorder to stop dubbing. on the DVD recorder.
divided into chapters at either 5 or 15-minute
intervals, according to the “DVD Auto Chapter” To play discs recorded with this recorder on
setting in the “Features” setup (page 105). other DVD equipment
Finalize the disc (see page 91). DVD VIDEO

To dub using the on-screen menu

DVD VIDEO
1 After step 4 above, press SYSTEM MENU.
2 Select “Dubbing” from the System Menu, and
press ENTER.

Dubbing (TAPE y DVD)

SYSTEM
3 Select “Simple Dubbing,” and press ENTER. MENU TITLE LIST
TOP MENU M/m/</,,
Dubbing 10:10
SYSTEM ENTER
MENU Title List Simple Dubbing VIDEO --> DVD
O RETURN
M/m/</,, Timer Program Dubbing DVD --> VIDEO ./>
ENTER H
DV Dubbing
Edit

Dubbing x
H X
Disc Setting
X
x REC MODE
4 Select “VIDEO t DVD,” and press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
REC MODE
5 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
Dubbing starts.
DVD t

T VIDEO
z Hints
• A black (no signal) screen at the end of the dubbed disc
is not a malfunction. This screen is recorded if a time
discrepancy exists between the disc and tape when the
recording is stopped.
• When dubbing a VHS tape to a DVD, the VHS tape
counter value may differ slightly from the DVD
recording time.
• VCR playback sound is output during dubbing. 1 Press VIDEO and insert a VHS tape with its
1 Press DVD and insert a recordable disc. safety tab in place.
To select the recording mode, press REC To select the recording mode, SP or LP, press
MODE repeatedly (see page 47). REC MODE repeatedly.
,continued 87 88

2 Insert a source disc.

Notes Dubbing 10:10 Scene Dubbing 10:10

3 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder. • Dubbing cannot be made when “Progressive” is set to Title List Create Dubbing List Scene No.01

4 Press TOP MENU or TITLE LIST to select a

“On” in the “Video” setup (page 102).
• Dubbing stops when:
Timer

Edit
Program Dubbing List
Start

title. – the DVD is played back to the end and stops. Start 00:00:10 End

Dubbing
5 Start playing the DVD, and then press x
– the DVD deck or the VHS video deck is stopped.
– the tape remaining time runs out. Disc Setting
T
00:00:10
Make

(stop) or X (pause) at the point where you • The System Menu, TOOLS menu, and information
Dubbing List No. 1
--.---.---- --:--
End 00:00:00 Finish
Setup
want to start dubbing. display are not displayed during dubbing.
To select DVD sound, language, or subtitle, • Copyrights
– Recordings made from discs and other copyrighted
press (audio) or
playback (see page 35).
(subtitle) during
material are solely for individual enjoyment, and 6 Select “Create Dubbing List,” and press 10Press ENTER at the end point.
other unauthorized use is prohibited under copyright ENTER. “Make” is selected.
6 Press DVD t on the recorder. law.
– Unauthorized editing of copyrighted material is
If you have performed Programme Dubbing To reset the start or end point, select “Start” or
Dubbing starts. before, the display asks for confirmation. To “End” and repeat from step 9 or 10.
prohibited under copyright law.
continue, select “Yes” and press ENTER.
The display for selecting titles appears.
11Press ENTER.
To stop dubbing Dubbing selected titles and scenes To continue, repeat from step 9.
Press x. (Programme Dubbing) Create Dubbing List 10:10 12Select “Finish,” and press ENTER.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the 1/2 No. Title Length Edit The Program Dubbing List appears with the
recorder to stop dubbing. You can select titles or scenes from a DVD, and 01 Prog. 1 00:05:04 >
selected scene.
dub the contents to a VHS tape all at once. 02 Prog. 2 00:00:51 >

To dub using the on-screen menu

1 Press VIDEO and insert a VHS tape with its Program Dubbing List 10:10

1 After step 5 above, press SYSTEM MENU. safety tab in place. T Prog. 1
No. Title Length Edit

01 Prog. 1 00:05:04 >

2 Select “Dubbing” from the System Menu, and To select the recording mode, SP or LP, press 02.May.2005
08:00 Addition

press ENTER. REC MODE repeatedly. Erase

2
Dubbing (TAPE y DVD)

3 Select “Simple Dubbing,” and press ENTER. Press DVD and insert a source disc.
To select DVD sound, language, or subtitle,
7 Select the title you want to dub, and press T Prog. 1
Check

Dubbing 10:10
press (audio) or (subtitle) during ENTER. 02.May.2005
03:25
Dubbing

Title List Simple Dubbing VIDEO --> DVD

playback (see page 35). The sub-menu appears.
Timer Program Dubbing DVD --> VIDEO To dub the entire title, select “Title Dubbing”
Edit
DV Dubbing 3 Press SYSTEM MENU. and press ENTER. The Program Dubbing List 13Select an option and press ENTER, if
The System Menu appears. appears with the selected title. Go to step 13. necessary.
Dubbing

Disc Setting 4 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER. To select a scene to dub, go to step 8. “Addition”: Adds other titles or scenes.

Dubbing 10:10
8 Select “Scene Dubbing,” and press Repeat from step 7.
“Erase”: Cancels the selected title or scene.
4 Select “DVD t VIDEO,” and press ENTER. ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
Title List Simple Dubbing When asked for confirmation, select “OK”
Timer Program Dubbing
The display for setting a scene appears. and press ENTER.
5 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
Edit
DV Dubbing
“Start” is selected. “Check”: Plays back the selected title or
Dubbing starts. scene. When playback finishes or when you
Dubbing
If the disc’s menu appears when DVD Scene Dubbing 10:10
press O RETURN, the display returns to
playback finishes, press x to stop dubbing. Disc Setting Scene No.01
“Program Dubbing List.”
Otherwise the disc’s menu is recorded until Setup
Start
the tape reaches its end. To cancel dubbing, press O RETURN.
Start 00:00:00 End

5 Select “Program Dubbing,” and press 00:00:07

Make
14Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.
z Hints Dubbing starts.
ENTER. T Dubbing List No. 1
Finish
• The brightness of the playback picture may differ from --.---.---- --:--
End 00:00:00

normal DVD playback picture.

• The DVD playback time may differ slightly from the
To stop dubbing
VHS tape counter value.
• The sound being played back (main, sub, etc.) is the
9 Press ENTER at the start point. Press x.
You can use H, , ./ Note that it may take a few seconds for the
dubbed sound.
>, x, and X to find the point. recorder to stop dubbing.
“End” is selected.
,continued 89 90

1-21
z Hints
• The brightness of the playback video may differ from
that during normal DVD playback. Finalizing a Disc (Preparing
• The DVD playback time may differ slightly from the
VHS tape counter value.
a Disc for Playback on DVD Disc will be finalized.
Do you want to continue ?

• The sound being played back (main, sub, etc.) is the

dubbed sound.
Other Equipment) OK Cancel

+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R

Notes
• Dubbing cannot be made when “Progressive” is set to Finalizing is necessary in order to play discs
7 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
“On” in the “Video” setup.
SYSTEM The recorder starts finalizing the disc.
recorded with this recorder on other DVD MENU
• Dubbing stops when: equipment. M/m/</,,
– the DVD is played back to the end and stops. When you finalize a DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video ENTER
– the DVD deck or the VHS video deck is stopped. To turn off the display
mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R, a DVD menu will be
– the tape remaining time runs out. Press SYSTEM MENU.
• The System Menu, TOOLS menu, and information automatically created, which can be displayed on
display are not displayed during dubbing. other DVD equipment. To unfinalize a DVD-RW (VR mode)
• Copyrights Before finalizing, check the differences between
If you cannot record or edit on a DVD-RW (VR
– Recordings made from discs and other copyrighted the disc types in the table below. 1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder. mode) that has been finalized, unfinalize the disc
material are solely for individual enjoyment, and
other unauthorized use is prohibited under copyright Differences between the disc types 2 Insert a disc. by selecting “Unfinalize” in step 6 above.
law.
– Unauthorized editing of copyrighted material is +RW Discs are automatically finalized when 3 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is z Hints
prohibited under copyright law. removed from the recorder. If you want in stop mode. • You can check whether the disc has been finalized or
• Once you eject the disc, the Program Dubbing List is to record on it again, reformat the disc The System Menu appears. not. If you cannot select “Finalize” in step 6 above, the
erased. (page 69). Note however, that disc has already been finalized.
reformatting a disc erases all its 4 Select “Disc Setting,” and press ENTER. • To check the disc information, select “Disc
contents. The “Disc Setting” display appears. Information” in the “Disc Setting” display and press
ENTER. See page 69 for details.
-RWVR Finalizing is unnecessary when playing a

Dubbing (TAPE y DVD)

Disc Setting 10:10
disc on VR format compatible equipment. Title List
Even if your other DVD equipment is
Disc Name : Notes
Timer Disc Protect : Not Protected
VR format compatible, you may need to • Depending on the condition of the disc, the recording,
Disc Format : VR Mode
finalize the disc, especially if the Edit or the DVD equipment, discs may not play even if the
Disc Finalize : Unfinalized
recording time is short. After finalizing, Dubbing
discs are finalized.
Disc Information
you cannot edit or record on the disc. If • The recorder may not be able to finalize a disc if it was
Disc Setting Erase All Titles
you want to edit or record on it again, recorded on another recorder.
unfinalize or reformat the disc (page 69). Setup
Note however, that reformatting a disc
erases all its contents.
-RWVideo Finalizing is necessary in order to play 5 Select “Disc Finalize,” and press ENTER.
on equipment other than this recorder. The display asks for confirmation.
After finalizing, you cannot edit or
record on the disc. If you want to edit or
record on it again, unfinalize or reformat
the disc (page 69). Note however, that
Do you want to finalize this disc ?
reformatting a disc erases all its
contents. Finalize Unfinalize

+R Finalizing is necessary in order to play

on equipment other than this recorder.
-R After finalizing, you cannot further edit 6 Select “Finalize,” and press ENTER.
or record on the disc. The display for confirmation appears again.

,continued 91 92

2 Press Z (open/close), and place a

DV Dubbing (DV t DVD)

Connecting a Digital Video Dubbing From a DV Format recordable disc on the disc tray.

Camera to the DV IN Jack Tape to a DVD

Before DV Dubbing +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R
You can connect a digital video camera to the DV
This section explains dubbing with a digital video IN jack on the recorder to record or edit from a DV
camera via the DV IN jack on the front panel. If format tape. You can record a DV format tape onto a disc. The
you want to dub by way of the LINE 2 IN jacks, Operation is straightforward because the DVD recorder controls the digital video camera. You Recording side facing down
see “Recording From Connected Equipment recorder will fast forward and rewind the tape for can fast forward, rewind, play in slow motion, and
Without a Timer” on page 57. you – you do not need to operate your digital video
camera. Do the following to start using the “DV
stop the tape to select the scenes using the on- 3 Press Z to close the disc tray.
screen menu. Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front
To record from the DV IN jack Edit” functions of this recorder. To simply dub the entire contents of a DV format panel display.
The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to the See the instruction manual supplied with the tape (One Touch Dubbing), see page 96. Unused DVD-RWs are formatted in VR mode
i.LINK standard. You can connect any other digital video camera as well before connecting.
◆How titles and chapters are created automatically. To format in Video mode, see
equipment that has an i.LINK (DV) jack, and The dubbed contents on the disc become one title, page 105.
record digital signals. Notes
Follow the instructions in “Connecting a Digital • The DV IN jack is for input only. It will not output
and the title is then divided into chapters at either
5 or 15-minute intervals, according to the “DVD
4 Insert the source DV format tape into your
Video Camera to the DV IN Jack” and then move signals. digital video camera.
Auto Chapter” setting in the “Features” setup
on to the section on dubbing. • You cannot use the DV IN jack when:
(page 105). For the recorder to record or edit, your digital
For more information about i.LINK, see “About – your digital video camera does not work with this video camera must be set to video playback
i.LINK” on page 117. recorder. Connect the camera to the LINE 2 IN jacks mode.
and follow the instructions of “Recording From
z Hint Connected Equipment Without a Timer” on page 57. Z 5 Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select
If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after the – the input signal is not in DVC-SD format. Do not DVD “DV.”
connect a MICRO MV format digital video camera
initial dub, use the DV IN jack and record on a DVD-RW
(VR mode). even if it has an i.LINK jack.
PROG +/– 6 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the
– the images on the tape contain copy protection recording mode.
signals, which limit recording. INPUT For details about the recording mode, see
SELECT page 47.
DV Dubbing (DV t DVD)

Hookups
VCR-DVD recorder
SYSTEM
MENU
7 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is
M/m/</,, in stop mode.
ENTER The System Menu appears.
O RETURN
8 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER.
The “Setup” display appears.
DV IN
to DV IN 9 Select “Audio,” and press ENTER.
Audio 10:10

REC MODE Title List Digital Out : On

Timer Downmix : Dolby Surround

i.LINK cable
Audio DRC : Standard
(not supplied) Edit
Scan Audio : On
Dubbing

1 Press DVD to operate the DVD recorder. Disc Setting

DV Audio Input
Line Audio Input
: Stereo 1
: Stereo

Setup

to DV output

Digital video camera

: Signal flow

93 94

1-22
10 Select “DV Audio Input,” and press ENTER. If “DV” or “DV Camera Mode” is displayed
Dubbing an entire DV format tape to
instead of “DV Tape Mode,” check that the
Audio 10:10

Title List Digital Out : On

digital video camera is correctly connected a DVD (One Touch Dubbing)
and its power turned on, and that its mode is
Timer Downmix : Dolby Surround
set for dubbing. +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R
Audio DRC : Standard
Edit

Dubbing
Scan Audio : On 16 Find the dubbing start point on the tape, You can record the entire contents of a DV format
DV Audio Input : Stereo 1 1
Stereo and stop or pause playback. tape onto a disc with a single press of the ONE
Disc Setting Line Audio Input : Stereo
Stereo 2 Press </, to select m, x, X, y, H, or TOUCH DUBBING button. The recorder controls
Setup Mix M on the TV screen and press ENTER to the digital video camera for the whole process, and
find the point, and stop or pause with x or X. completes the recording.
“Stereo 1”: Records original sound only.
17 Press , to select z on the TV screen, and
Normally select this when dubbing a DV press ENTER.
Dubbing starts. x
format tape.
“Stereo 2”: Records additional audio only.
“Mix”: Records original and additional ONE TOUCH
sounds. To stop recording DUBBING
Select “Stereo 2” or “Mix” if you have added Select x on the TV screen, and press ENTER.
a second audio channel when recording with Note that it may take a few seconds for the
your digital video camera. recorder to stop recording.
For the details, see page 104.
To turn off the display for DV dubbing
11 Select an option, and press ENTER. Press INPUT SELECT or PROG +/–.
12 Press O RETURN twice. z Hint
13 Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER. If “DV Camera Mode” appears on the TV screen, you can
use z on the TV screen to record the camera image
Dubbing 10:10 directly on the recorder. Follow steps 1 to 11 of “Dubbing From a DV
Title List Simple Dubbing
Format Tape to a DVD” (page 94), and press
Notes

DV Dubbing (DV t DVD)

Timer Program Dubbing
ONE TOUCH DUBBING on the remote.
DV Dubbing
Edit • If you want to play the disc on other DVD equipment, The recorder rewinds the tape in the digital video
finalize the disc (page 91). camera and then starts recording the tape contents
Dubbing
• You cannot connect more than one piece of digital
from the beginning.
Disc Setting video equipment to the recorder.
• You cannot record the date, time, or contents of a DV When playback of the tape stops, One Touch
14 Select “DV Dubbing,” and press ENTER. format tape onto the disc. Dubbing ends automatically.
• If you record from a DV format tape with a soundtrack
DV Dubbing 10:10
that is recorded in multiple sampling frequencies
Title List DV Simple Dubbing (48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz), no sound, or an To stop recording
Timer DV One Touch Dubbing unnatural sound will be output when playing back the Press x.
sampling frequency switch point on the disc. Note that it may take a few seconds for the
Edit
• The recorded picture may be momentarily affected if
recorder to stop recording.
Dubbing the picture size of the source image changes, or if there
Disc Setting is nothing recorded on the tape.
z Hint
• Noise may occur when you switch the audio sampling
You can also perform One Touch Dubbing using the
15 Select “DV Simple Dubbing,” and press mode (48 kHz/16 bits t 32 kHz/12 bits).
System Menu. Select “Dubbing,” and select “DV One
ENTER. Touch Dubbing.” Follow the instructions appearing on
The following display appears. the TV screen.

DV Tape Mode

,continued 95 96

2 Select “Setup,” and press ENTER. Some items display a dialogue box that

Settings and Adjustments

Setup 10:10
requires additional settings.
Example: When “Parental” in “Options”
Aerial Reception Setting
Title List Tuner Preset
Clock Set
setup is selected. (Tuner Preset)
Using the Setup Displays Timer

Edit
Video Create the password. 10:10

Audio Title List The “Tuner Preset” setup allows you to make
By using the setup displays, you can make various
Dubbing
Features Timer tuner settings for the recorder.
Create the password.
adjustments to items such as picture and sound, as Disc Setting Options
Edit
Select “Tuner Preset” in the “Setup” display.
Easy Setup
well as select a language for the subtitles. Setup
Dubbing Tuner Preset 10:10
The setup displays are used in the following way.
Disc Setting Title List Auto Preset

Note 3 Select “Tuner Preset,” “Clock Set,” Setup Timer Manual Set
Channel List
Playback settings stored on the disc take priority over the “Video,” “Audio,” “Features,” “Options,” Edit

setup display settings, and not all of the functions or “Easy Setup,” and press ENTER.
described may work. The selected setup display appears. 5 Select an option, and press ENTER.
Dubbing

Disc Setting
Example: “Video” setup The currently selected option is displayed
next to the setup item. Setup
Video 10:10
Example: When “16:9” is set.
Title List TV Type : 4:3 Letter Box
Video 10:10
Timer Picture Control : Standard Note
Title List TV Type : 16:9
Line 1 Output : Video
Edit You cannot preset channels for a connected satellite or
Component Out : Off Timer Picture Control : Standard
digital tuner.
Dubbing Line 1 Output : Video
Progressive : Off Edit
Disc Setting Component Out : Off
Dubbing
Progressive : Off
SYSTEM Setup
Disc Setting
Auto Preset
MENU Automatically presets the receivable channels.
M/m/</,, Setup
All receivable channels are preset in numerical
O RETURN
ENTER
4 Select the item you want to set up, and sequence.
press ENTER. Select “Auto Preset,” and press ENTER.
Available options for the item appear.
Example: “TV Type” To return to the previous display Tuner Preset 10:10

1 Press O RETURN. Title List

Settings and Adjustments

Searching for receivable channels.

Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is Video 10:10
Timer
in stop mode. Title List TV Type : 4:316:9
Letter Box
To turn off the display 35%
4:3 Letter Box Edit
Timer Picture Control : Standard
Title List (Original) 10:10 4:3 Pan Scan
Press SYSTEM MENU. Scanning... Please wait.
Line 1 Output : Video Dubbing
Edit
Title List
Component Out : Off
Disc Setting
Press ENTER : Dubbing Stop
Timer Progressive : Off
Setup
Disc Setting
Edit Title Menu for DVD Title List.
Setup
Dubbing
Manual Set
Disc Setting
Presets or disables channels manually.
Setup
If some channels could not be set using the “Auto
Preset” or “Easy Setup” function, you can set them
manually.
1 Select “Manual Set,” and press ENTER.
The display for manual setting appears.

,continued 97 98

1-23
 programme positions will be skipped when you 2 Press M/m to set the day, and press ,.
Manual Set
press PROG +/–.
Clock Setting (Clock Set) Set the month, year, hour, and minutes, in
sequence. Press </, to select the item to be
Program 01 1 Select “Channel List” and press ENTER.
Channel 002 The list of all the preset channels appears. set, then press M/m to set the item. The day of
The “Clock Set” setup allows you to make clock the week is set automatically.
AFT On
settings for the recorder.
Tuner Audio
Station Name
NICAM
AAC
Channel List 10:10 Select “Clock Set” in the “Setup” display. 3 Press ENTER to start the clock.
Prog. CH Name

1 002 AAC
Clock Set 10:10
2 005 AAB
Title List Auto Adjust : On
3 011 DDE

4 012 FGH Timer Present Time : Sat 21. 5. 2005 10:10

2 Select an option and press ENTER. 5 061 PQR
Edit
6 128 QQR

“Program”: Press M/m repeatedly to select the Dubbing

programme position (1 to 80) for the channel Disc Setting

and press ENTER. 2 Press M/m to select the row containing the Setup
“Channel”: Press M/m to select the channel programme position you want to change or
number (002 to 255) and press ENTER. disable.
“AFT”: Fine tunes the channel to obtain a To change, press ENTER and go to step 3.
clearer picture. If the picture is not clear, To disable, press CLEAR and go to step 5. Auto Adjust
select “Off” and press ENTER. See “To adjust If there are more than six programme Turns on the Auto Clock Set function when a channel
pictures manually” (page 99). positions, press M/m repeatedly to display the in your local area broadcasts a time signal.
“Tuner Audio”: Sets the channels for the next page. The Auto Clock Set function is activated whenever
NICAM broadcast. Normally, select the recorder is turned off.
“NICAM.” If the sound from the NICAM 3 Press M/m until the selected channel row
broadcast is not clear, select “Standard” and moves to the desired programme position. If the recorder does not receive a time signal from
press ENTER. any station, “Auto Adjust” returns to “Off”
“Station Name”: Changes a station name. See Channel List 10:10 automatically and the display for setting the clock
“To rename the station” (page 99). Prog. CH Name manually appears. See “Present Time” below.
1 102 AAC
◆To adjust pictures manually 2 005 AAB

Select “Off” for “AFT” in the display for manual 3 011 DDE
Note
setting. When the fine tuning bar appears, press 4 002 AAC The Auto Clock Set function does not work while
</, to obtain a clearer picture, then press recording.
Settings and Adjustments

5 061 PQR

6 128 QQR
ENTER.
Present Time
Fine Tuning If the Auto Clock Set function does not set the
4 Press ENTER. clock correctly for your local area, set the clock
The selected channel is inserted at the new manually.
programme position. 1 Select “Present Time,” and press ENTER.
◆To rename the station 5 To change or disable the programme position
Clock Set 10:10
You can set up to four characters for the station of another station, repeat from step 2.
Title List
name. Select “Station Name” in the display for Set the time and date.
manual setting. Note Timer Day Month Year

Press M/m to select a character. Edit

21 05 2005 Sat
Be sure to correctly select the programme position you
Each time you press M, the character changes as want to disable. If you disable the wrong programme Dubbing
follows: A t B... t Z t 0 t 1... t 9 t - t position by mistake, you need to reset that channel
Hour Min
Disc Setting
A manually. 10 : 10

Press , to set the next character. To correct a Setup

character, press < and reset it. After setting all

characters, press ENTER.

Channel List
You can change or disable the programme
positions after setting the channels. The disabled
99 100

Component Out z Hint

Note To cancel the “Progressive” setting, press X PAUSE on
Video Settings (Video) Depending on the disc, “4:3 Letter Box” may be selected
Selects whether or not to output video signals
from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks. the recorder continuously for five seconds or more, or
automatically instead of “4:3 Pan Scan” or vice versa. select “Off” in step 2 above.
The “Video” setup allows you to adjust items On Outputs the component video
related to the image, such as size and colour. Picture Control signals. Select this when you want Note
Choose the settings according to the type of TV or You can adjust the video signal from the recorder to view progressive signals. If you select progressive signals when you connect the
tuner connected to the recorder. to obtain the picture quality you want. Select the recorder to a TV that cannot accept the signal in
setting that best suits the programme you are Off Outputs no signals. progressive format, the image quality will deteriorate. In
Select “Video” in the “Setup” display. watching. this case, set “Progressive” to “Off.”
The default settings are underlined. Notes
Dynamic 1 Produces a bold dynamic picture
by increasing the picture contrast • When you set “Line 1 Output” to “RGB,” you cannot
Video 10:10
and the colour intensity. set “Component Out” to “On.”
Title List TV Type : 4:3 Letter Box • When you connect the recorder to a monitor or
Timer Picture Control : Standard Dynamic 2 Produces a more dynamic picture projector via only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Edit
Line 1 Output : Video than Dynamic 1 by further jacks, do not select “Off,” as the picture will not appear.
Component Out : Off increasing the picture contrast
Dubbing
Progressive : Off and the colour intensity. Progressive
Disc Setting If your TV accepts progressive (525p/625p)
Setup
Standard Displays a standard picture format signals, you will enjoy accurate colour
(function turned off). reproduction and high quality image.
Cinema 1 White colours become brighter 1 Select “Progressive,” and press ENTER.
and black colours become richer,
TV Type and the colour contrast is
2 Select “On,” and press ENTER.
Selects the aspect ratio of the connected TV (4:3 increased.
Video 10:10
standard or wide).
Cinema 2 Enhances details in dark areas by Title List
Progressive Scan Output
TV Type : 4:3 Pan Scan
1) Ensure your TV is progressive scan capable.
16:9 Select this when connecting to a increasing the black level. Black Level
Timer 2) Connect : On
with component video output jacks.
wide-screen TV or TV with a Picture Control
(red/green/blue : Standard
connections)
Edit
wide mode function. Personal Adjusts “Contrast,” “Brightness,” 3) Select [OK] to test your video signal.
Progressive : Off
4) If video signal appears OK,
“Colour,” and “Hue” using M/m/ Dubbing
video connection is complete.
4:3 Letter Select this when connecting to a </,. Disc Setting
Box 4:3 screen TV. Displays a wide OK Cancel
Setup
picture with bands on the upper
Settings and Adjustments

z Hint
and lower portions of the screen. When you watch a movie, “Cinema 1” or “Cinema 2” is

4:3 Pan Select this when connecting to a

recommended. 3 Follow the instructions appearing on the TV
Scan 4:3 screen TV. Automatically
screen.
Line 1 Output 1) Ensure your TV is progressive scan
displays a wide picture on the
entire screen and cuts off the
Selects a method of outputting video signals for capable.
portions that do not fit. the i LINE 1-TV jack. 2) Connect with component video output
jacks (red/green/blue connections).
Video Outputs video signals
16:9
See “If your TV has component video input
RGB Outputs RGB signals. jacks” on page 16.
3) Select [OK] to test your video signal.
4) If video signal appears OK, video
Note connection is complete.
4:3 Letter Box You cannot select “RGB” when “Component Out” below 4 Select “OK” and press ENTER.
is set to “On.”
The PROGRESSIVE indicator on the
recorder lights up.
If picture is distorted, press O RETURN.
4:3 Pan Scan
Check the connection (page 16).

,continued 101 102

1-24
 Downmix (DVDs only)
Note Note
Audio Settings (Audio) If you connect a component that does not accept the
Switches the method for mixing down to two
channels when you play a DVD which has rear Sound will be interrupted during Scan Audio.
selected audio signal, a loud noise (or no sound) will
sound elements (channels) or is recorded in Dolby
The “Audio” setup allows you to adjust the sound come out from the speakers, and may affect your ears or DV Audio Input
cause speaker damage. Digital format. For details on the rear signal
according to the playback and connection components, see “A Connecting to audio L/R
conditions. ◆Dolby Digital (DVDs only) jacks” on page 18. This affects the output from the Stereo 1 Records original sound only.
Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal. following jacks: Normally select this when
Select “Audio” in the “Setup” display. dubbing a DV format tape.
D-PCM Select this when the recorder – LINE 2 OUT (AUDIO L/R), AUDIO OUT L/R
The default settings are underlined. jacks
is connected to an audio Stereo 2 Records additional audio
component lacking a built-in – LINE 1-TV jack only.
Audio 10:10
Dolby Digital decoder. You – DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or
Title List Digital Out : On can select whether the COAXIAL) jack only when “Dolby Digital” is Mix Records both original and
Timer Downmix : Dolby Surround signals conform to Dolby set to “D-PCM.” additional sounds.
Edit
Audio DRC : Standard Surround or not by making
Scan Audio : On adjustments to the Dolby Normally select this
Dubbing
DV Audio Input : Stereo 1 “Downmix” item in “Audio” Surround position. Note
Disc Setting Line Audio Inout : Stereo setup (page 104). Multi-channel audio signals Select “Stereo 2” or “Mix” if you have added a second
are output to two channels audio channel when recording with your digital video
Setup
Dolby Select this when the recorder for enjoying surround camera.
Digital is connected to an audio sounds.
component with a built-in Line Audio Input (for DVD-RWs in VR mode)
Dolby Digital decoder. Normal Multi-channel audio signals When recording from equipment connected to the
Digital Out are downmixed to two LINE input jack to a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc in
Selects if audio signals are output from the ◆DTS (DVD VIDEOs only) channels for use with your this recorder, select line input audio.
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or Selects whether or not to output DTS signals. stereo.
For details about bilingual recording, see page 47.
COAXIAL) jack.
On Select this when the recorder Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) (DVDs
On Normally select this. Press is connected to an audio Stereo Records stereo sound only.
ENTER, and select “Dolby component with a built-in only)
Digital,” “DTS,” or DTS decoder. Makes the sound clear when the volume is turned Bilingual Records the two different
“MPEG” for further settings down when playing a DVD that conforms to soundtracks on DVD-RWs
(see below). Off Select this when the recorder “Audio DRC.” This affects the output from the (VR mode). You can select
is connected to an audio either soundtrack when
following jacks: playing back the disc.
Off The influence of the digital
Settings and Adjustments
component without a built-in – LINE 2 OUT (AUDIO L/R), AUDIO OUT L/R
circuit upon the analogue DTS decoder. jacks z Hint
circuit is minimum.
– LINE 1-TV jack Audio selected with the connected equipment is recorded
◆MPEG (DVD VIDEOs only) – DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or
The following setup items switches the method of on a disc other than DVD-RWs (VR mode).
Selects the type of MPEG audio signal. COAXIAL) jack only when “Dolby Digital” is
outputting audio signals when you connect a
component such as an amplifier (receiver) with a set to “D-PCM.”
PCM Select this when the recorder
digital input jack. is connected to an audio Standard Normally select this.
For connection details, see “Step 4: Connecting to component without a built-in
Your AV Amplifier (Receiver)” on page 17. MPEG decoder. If you play Wide Gives you the feeling of
MPEG audio sound tracks, Range being at a live performance.
Digital Out 10:10 the recorder outputs stereo
Title List
signals via the DIGITAL
Dolby Digital : D-PCM
AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or Scan Audio (DVDs only)
Timer DTS : Off
COAXIAL) jack.
Edit
MPEG : PCM On Outputs audio signals during
MPEG Select this when the recorder FF1 fast-forward of a DVD
Dubbing
is connected to an audio disc with Dolby Digital
Disc Setting
component with a built-in soundtracks. For details, see
MPEG decoder. page 38.
Setup

Off Turns off the function.

No sound is output during
FF1 fast-forward.

,continued 103 104

VCR Function Synchro Recording

Recording and VCR Settings Press ENTER and select “Tape Length,” “Auto
Play,” “Auto Repeat” or “Colour System.” to DVD Sets the recorder to record Language, Parental Control
(Features) ◆Tape Length
programmes from connected
equipment that has a timer
Settings/Factory Settings
The “Features” setup allows you to change the E180 For E180 or shorter length tapes.
function (such as a satellite tuner)
to a DVD disc.
(Options)
tape length, auto play and auto repeat settings.
E240 For E240 length tapes. to Video Sets the recorder to record The “Options” setup allows you to set up other
Select “Features” in the “Setup” display. programmes from connected operational settings.
E260 For E260 length tapes. equipment that has a timer
The default settings are underlined.
function (such as a satellite tuner) Select “Options” in the “Setup” display.
Features 10:10 E300 For E300 or longer length tapes. to a VHS tape. The default settings are underlined.
Title List DVD Auto Chapter : 5 min
◆Auto Play
Timer Format DVD : VR DVD Bilingual Rec. (for all recordable discs Options 10:10
VCR Function
Edit On Starts playback automatically, except DVD-RWs in VR mode) Title List Language
Synchro Recording : to DVD
Dubbing
when you insert a tape with its Selects the sound to be recorded on the disc. This Timer Parental
DVD Bilingual Rec. : Main safety tab removed.
Disc Setting
setting is not necessary when recording on DVD- Edit
Front Display : Auto

RWs (VR mode) that record both the main and sub Command Mode : DVD 3
Setup Off Turns off the function. You need Dubbing
Factory Setting
to press H (play) to start
sounds.
Disc Setting
playback, even if you insert a tape
with its safety tab removed. Main Records the main sound for Setup

bilingual programmes.
DVD Auto Chapter ◆Auto Repeat
Sub Records the sub sound for
Automatically divides a recording (a title) into bilingual programmes.
On Plays back a tape repeatedly. The Language
chapters by inserting chapter markings at
VCR rewinds a tape to the ◆OSD (On-Screen Display)
specified intervals. The markings are inserted beginning and restarts playback
while the recording is being made. automatically.
Switches the display language on the screen.
◆Disc Menu (DVD VIDEOs only)
Off No chapter mark is inserted. Off Turns off the function. Switches the language for the DVD menu.
5 min Inserts chapter marks at ◆Audio (DVD VIDEOs only)
approximately 5 minute ◆Colour System Switches the language of the soundtrack.
intervals.
Settings and Adjustments

Auto Selects the colour system When you select “Original,” the language given
automatically. Normally select priority in the disc is selected.
15 min Inserts chapter marks at
this. If streaks appear during ◆Subtitle (DVD VIDEOs only)
approximately 15 minute
playback, select the system that Switches the language of the subtitles recorded on
intervals.
the tape was recorded in (below). the disc.
PAL For a tape recorded in the PAL
When you select “Auto,” the subtitle language
Note changes according to the language you selected
colour system.
Actual intervals may differ depending on the size of the for the soundtrack. See page 124 for an
recording. The selected setting should be regarded as an B/W For a tape recorded in black and explanation of the language abbreviations.
approximate chapter interval. white.
z Hint
Format DVD (DVD-RWs only) NT4.43 When playing an NTSC-recorded If you select “Others” for “Disc Menu,” “Audio,” or
Selects the format for an unused DVD-RW, when tape on a multi-system TV. “Subtitle,” you can select from the additional 18
first inserted. languages. Press M/m to select the desired language and
NTPB When playing an NTSC-recorded press ENTER.
VR Automatically formats the disc in tape on a PAL TV.
VR mode. Note
If you select a language in “Disc Menu,” “Subtitle,” or
Video Automatically formats the disc in “Audio” that is not recorded on the DVD VIDEO, one of
Video mode. the recorded languages will be automatically selected.

,continued 105 106

1-25
Parental (DVD VIDEOs only) The lower the value, the stricter the limitation. Factory Setting
Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be limited
according to a predetermined level, such as the age
3 Select the level, and press ENTER. Allows you to return the setup settings to their
default settings. Note that all of your previous
Easy Setup
The Parental setting is complete.
of the users. Scenes may be blocked or replaced settings will be lost. (Resetting the Recorder)
with different scenes. To cancel the Parental setting for the disc, set 1 Select “Factory Setting,” and press ENTER.
1 Select “Parental,” and press ENTER. “Rating Level” to “Off” in step 2.
2 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
Select this to run the Easy Setup programme.
• If you have not entered a password, the To change the password, select “Change
The setup settings return to their default
display for registering a new password
appears.
Password” in step 2, and press ENTER. When the
display for registering a password appears, enter a
settings. 1 Select “Easy Setup” in the “Setup”
new four-digit password using the number 3 Press ENTER when “Finish” appears. display.
Enter a 4-digit password using the number
buttons. buttons. The power automatically turns off and then on
Easy Setup 10:10
again, and the recorder is reset to the factory
Create the password. 10:10 Notes settings. Follow the guide to make initial settings.

Title List When the “Easy Setup” display appears, Before you start,
• If you forget your password, select “Factory Setting” in check that you have made all necessary connections.

Timer the “Options” setup. follow the instructions for Easy Setup
Create the password.
• Playback of discs without the Parental Control function (page 22) from step 4. Start Cancel
Edit
cannot be limited on this recorder.
Dubbing
• Depending on the disc, you may be asked to change the
Disc Setting Parental Control level while playing the disc. In this
case, enter your password, then change the level.
Setup

Front Display 2 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.

The display for confirming the password Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display. 3 Follow the instructions for Easy Setup
appears. (page 22) from step 4.
Re-enter the password. Auto Adjusts to low lighting when
power is off.
• When you have already registered a
password, the display for entering the Bright Maintains bright lighting
password appears. when power is off.
Enter a 4-digit password using the number
Dimmer Maintains low lighting
buttons. regardless of whether the
power is on or off.
Settings and Adjustments

Enter the password. 10:10

Title List Off Turns off the lighting when

Timer power is off. Maintains the
Enter the password.
lighting when power is on.
Edit

Dubbing
Command Mode
Disc Setting Changes the command mode of this recorder if
Setup other DVD equipment is assigned the same
command mode. Be sure to match the
COMMAND MODE switch on the remote to the
2 Select “Rating Level,” and press ENTER.
setting made here. For details, see “If you have a
The selection items for “Rating Level” are
Sony DVD player or more than one Sony DVD
displayed.
recorder” on page 25.
Parental 10:10
DVD 1 Select the setting that does
Title List Rating Level : On:OffLevel 8 (Adults)
DVD 2 not conflict with other DVD
Timer Change Password Level 8 (Adults) equipment.
Level 7
Edit
Level 6
DVD 3 The default command mode
Dubbing Level 5
of this recorder.
Level 4
Disc Setting
Level 3
Setup Level 2

,continued 107 108

format. In this case, set “Progressive” to “Off” in equipment in question and connect it directly to COAXIAL) jack and want to change the audio
the “Video” setup (page 102). your TV. track for a DVD-RW (VR mode) during
Additional Information , You are playing a disc recorded in a colour playback, set “Digital Out” – “Dolby Digital” to
system that is different from your TV. The picture does not fill the screen. “D-PCM” in the “Audio” setup (page 103).
Troubleshooting , Set “TV Type” in the “Video” setup to fit the
TV programme reception does not fill the aspect ratio of your TV (page 101). DVD Playback
If you experience any of the following difficulties screen. The disc does not play.
while using the recorder, use this troubleshooting , Set the channel manually in “Tuner Preset” setup The picture does not fill the screen, even , The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with the
guide to help remedy the problem before (page 98). though the aspect ratio is set in “TV Type” in labelled side facing up.
requesting repairs. Should any problem persist, , Select the correct source using the INPUT the “Video” setup. , The disc is not correctly inserted.
consult your nearest Sony dealer. SELECT button, or select a programme position , Moisture has condensed inside the recorder.
, The aspect ratio of the disc is fixed on your DVD.
of any TV programme using the PROG +/– Remove the disc and leave the recorder turned on
buttons.
Power Sound for about half an hour until the moisture
evaporates.
The power does not turn on. TV programme pictures are distorted. There is no sound. , If the disc was recorded on another recorder, the
, Check that the mains lead is connected securely. , Reorient the TV aerial. , Re-connect all connections securely. recorder cannot play the disc if it was not
, Adjust the picture (see the TV’s instruction , The connecting cord is damaged. finalized (page 91).
Picture manual). , The input source setting on the amplifier or the
, Place the recorder and TV farther apart. connection to the amplifier is incorrect.
There is no picture. The disc does not start playback from the
, Place the TV and any bunched aerial cables , The recorder is in reverse play, fast-forward,
, Re-connect all connecting cords securely. beginning.
farther apart. slow motion, or pause mode.
, The connecting cords are damaged. , Resume play was activated (page 38).
, If the audio signal does not come through the
, Check the connection to your TV (page 13). , You have inserted a disc whose Title menu or
TV programme positions cannot be changed. DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or
, Switch the input selector on your TV (such as to DVD menu automatically appears on the TV
COAXIAL) jack, check the “Audio” setup
“VIDEO”) so that the signal from the recorder , The programme position is disabled (page 99). screen when it is first inserted. Use the menu to
settings (page 103).
appears on the TV screen. , A timer recording started, which cause the start playback.
, If you connect the recorder to your TV via only programme position to change.
the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, set Sound is noisy.
The recorder starts playing the disc
“Component Out” in the “Video” setup to “On” The picture from equipment connected to the , When playing a CD with DTS soundtracks, noise
will come from the LINE 2 OUT (AUDIO L/R) automatically.
(page 102). recorder’s input jack does not appear on the , The DVD VIDEO features an auto playback
, This recorder cannot record NTSC signals. jacks, AUDIO OUT L/R jacks, or LINE 1-TV
screen. jack (page 37). function.
, If the equipment is connected to the LINE 1-TV
Picture noise appears. jack, select “LINE1” in the front panel display by Playback stops automatically.
, Check the connection to your TV (page 13) and pressing INPUT SELECT. The sound volume is low.
, The sound volume is low on some DVDs. , If the disc has an auto pause signal, the recorder
switch the input selector on your TV so that the If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2 IN
Additional Information

The sound volume may improve if you set stops playback at the auto pause signal.
signal from the recorder appears on the TV jacks, select “LINE2” in the front panel display
screen. by pressing INPUT SELECT. “Audio DRC” in the “Audio” setup to “Wide
, If the picture output signal from your recorder If the equipment is connected to the LINE 3/ Range” (page 104). Some functions such as Stop, Search, or Slow-
passes through your VCR to get to your TV, or if DECODER jack, select “LINE3” in the front motion Play cannot be performed.
you are connected to a combination TV/VIDEO panel display by pressing INPUT SELECT. An alternate audio track cannot be recorded or , Depending on the disc, you may not be able to do
player, the copy-protection signal applied to If the equipment is connected to the DV IN jack played. some of the operations above. See the instruction
some DVD programmes could affect picture (this is usually for a digital video camera , When recording from connected equipment, set manual supplied with the disc.
connection), select “DV” in the front panel “Line Audio Input” in the “Audio” setup to , While the recorder is reading disc information,
quality. If you still experience this problem even
display by pressing INPUT SELECT. playback operations will not work.
when you connect your recorder directly to your “Bilingual”(page 104).
TV, try connecting your recorder to your TV’s , Multilingual tracks (main and sub) cannot be
S VIDEO input. The playback picture or TV programme from recorded on DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs (Video The language for the soundtrack cannot be
, You have set the recorder to progressive format the equipment connected through the recorder mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs. changed.
(the PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up) even is distorted. To record the language, select “Main” or “Sub” , Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the disc
though your TV cannot accept the progressive , If the playback picture output from a DVD of “DVD Bilingual Rec.” in the “Features” setup being played.
signal. In this case, set “Progressive” to “Off” in player, VCR, or tuner goes through your recorder before recording (page 106). , The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing of the
the “Video” setup (page 102). before reaching your TV, the copy-protection To record both the main and sub sounds, record language for the soundtrack.
, Even if your TV is compatible with progressive signal applied to some programmes could affect on a DVD-RW (VR mode). , Try changing the language using the DVD
format (525p/625p) signals, the image may be picture quality. Disconnect the playback , If you have connected an AV amplifier to the VIDEO’s menu.
affected when you set the recorder to progressive DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL or
,continued 109 110

1-26
The subtitle language cannot be changed or DVD Recording/Timer recording/ The c indicator flashes after timer recording is The picture has no sound.
turned off. set. , The tape is defective.
, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on the
Editing , Insert a recordable disc (page 30). , Check the audio cord connection.
DVD VIDEO. The programme position cannot be changed , Insert a disc with enough space for the recording.
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the from the channel you are recording. , The disc has 99 or more titles, which prevents A tape cannot be inserted.
subtitles. , Set the TV’s input source to “TV.” further recording. , Check that a tape is not already in the tape
, Try changing the subtitle using the DVD , The disc is protected (page 69). compartment.
VIDEO’s menu.
Recording does not start immediately after
, The subtitles cannot be changed for the titles
recorded on this recorder. z REC is pressed. The SYNCHRO REC indicator flashes after VCR Recording
, Operate the recorder only after “LOAD,” Synchro-Recording is set.
, Insert a recordable disc (page 30).
The programme position cannot be changed
“FORMAT,” or “INF WRITE” disappears from
The angles cannot be changed. , Insert a disc with enough space for the recording. from the one you are recording.
the front panel display.
, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD , The disc has 99 or more titles, which prevents , Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”
VIDEO being played. further recording.
, You are trying to change the angles when “ Nothing was recorded even though the timer
” , The disc is protected (page 69). No TV programme appears on the TV screen.
does not appear in the front panel display setting is set correctly. , Make sure the TV is set to the channel for the VCR.
(page 35). , The recorder was already turned on at the timer If a monitor is used, set it to video input.
recording start time. Set the recorder to standby Contents previously recorded were erased.
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing angles. , Select the correct source with the PROG +/– or
mode before timer recording starts. , Data that has been recorded on a DVD with a PC
, Try changing the angle using the DVD VIDEO’s INPUT SELECT buttons. Select a programme
, There was a power failure during recording. will be erased from the disc when the disc is
menu. position number when recording TV programmes;
, Disconnect the mains lead from the mains, and inserted.
, The angles cannot be changed for the titles select “LINE1,” “LINE2,” or “LINE3” when
recorded on this recorder. connect it again. recording from other equipment.
, The programme contains copy protection signals VCR Playback
that restrict copying.
The MP3 audio track cannot be played. The playback picture does not appear on the TV TV reception is poor.
, The programme that starts first has priority and
, The DATA CD is not recorded in the MP3 screen. , Adjust the TV aerial.
the second programme starts recording only after
format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/
the first programme has finished. If the , Make sure the TV is set to the channel for the VCR.
Level 2.
programmes start at the same time, the If you are using a monitor, set it to video input. The tape starts playing as soon as it is
, The MP3 audio track does not have the extension
programme listed first in the menu has priority inserted.
“.MP3.”
(page 51). The picture is not clear. , The safety tab has been removed. To record on
, The data is not formatted in MP3 even though it
, There is no DVD inserted in the recorder. , Adjust the tracking by the TRACKING +/– this tape, cover the tab hole.
has the extension “.MP3.”
, There is not enough disc space for the recording. buttons.
, The data is not MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 data.
, The recorder cannot play audio tracks in , Set “Colour System” in the “Features” setup The tape is ejected when z REC is pressed.
MP3PRO format. Recording does not stop immediately after correctly to match the colour system that the tape , Check that the safety tab has not been removed.
Additional Information

x (stop) is pressed. was recorded in (page 105).

, It will take a few seconds for the recorder to input , The video heads are dirty (see page 114). Clean
The JPEG image file cannot be played. Nothing happens when z REC is pressed.
disc data before recording can stop. the video heads using a Sony video head cleaning
, The DATA CD is not recorded in a JPEG format , Make sure the tape is not at its end.
cassette. If a Sony cleaning cassette is not
that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2.
available in your area, have the heads cleaned at
, The JPEG image file does not have the extension Timer recording is not complete or did not start
“.JPG” or “.JPEG.” from the beginning.
your nearest Sony dealer (a standard service fee VCR Timer recording
will be charged). Do not use a commercially
, The data is not formatted in JPEG even though it , There was a power failure during recording. If The timer does not operate.
available liquid type cleaning cassette, as it may
has the extension “.JPG” or “JPEG.” the power recovers when there is a timer , Check that the clock is set.
damage the video heads.
, The length or width of the image is more than recording, the recorder resumes recording. , Make sure a tape has been inserted.
, The video heads may have to be replaced.
4,720 dots. , The programme that starts first has priority and , Check that the safety tab has not been removed.
Consult your local Sony dealer for more
the second programme starts recording only after , Make sure the tape is not at its end.
information.
The title of the MP3 audio album/ track or JPEG the first programme has finished. If the , Make sure a programme has been set for timer
, The tape is defective.
programmes start at the same time, the recording.
image folder/file is not correctly displayed.
programme listed first in the menu has priority , Make sure the timer settings are set for a future
, The recorder can only display numbers and The picture rolls vertically during picture
(page 51). time.
alphabet. Other characters are displayed as search.
, There is not enough disc space for the recording. , Check that the satellite or digital tuner is turned
asterisks.
, Adjust the vertical hold control on the TV or on.
monitor. , “- -:- -” appears in the front panel display if the

,continued 111 112

recorder is disconnected from the mains for more – A disc that has cellophane tape or sticker
Other Sony equipment responds to the remote.
than one minute. Reset the clock and timer.
, Turn the power off and unplug the mains lead.
, The same command mode is set for both the Notes About This Recorder adhesive on it.
Sony DVD equipment. Set a different command
, The recorder was already turned on at the timer Symptoms caused by contaminated video
mode for the recorder (page 25). On adjusting volume
recording start time. Set the recorder to standby heads
mode before timer recording starts. Do not turn up the volume while listening to a
, The programme that starts first has priority and Others section with very low level inputs or no audio
the second programme starts recording only after signals. If you do, the speakers may be damaged
the first programme has finished. If the The recorder does not operate properly. when a peak level section is played.
programmes start at the same time, the , Restart the recorder. Press down "/1 on the initial terminal
programme listed first in the menu has priority recorder for more than ten seconds until “SONY On cleaning contamination
(page 80). DVD” appears in the front panel display. Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a soft
, When static electricity, etc., causes the recorder cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent When the video heads are dirty, clean the video
to operate abnormally, turn off the recorder and solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, heads using a Sony video head cleaning cassette.
The c indicator flashes after timer recording is wait until the clock appears in the front panel If a Sony cleaning cassette is not available in your
scouring powder or solvent such as alcohol or
set. display. Then, unplug the recorder and after benzine. area, have the heads cleaned at your nearest Sony
, Check that the safety tab has not been removed. leaving it off for a while, plug it in again. dealer (a standard service fee will be charged). Do
On cleaning discs, disc/lens cleaners not use a commercially available liquid type
The SYNCHRO REC indicator flashes after Do not use a commercially available cleaning cleaning cassette, as it may damage the video
The disc tray does not open after you press heads.
Synchro-Recording is set. disc or disc/lens cleaner (liquid or spray type).
Z (open/close).
, Check that the safety tab has not been removed. These may cause the apparatus to malfunction.
, It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to
open after you have recorded or edited a disc. Notes about the discs
Display This is because the recorder is adding disc data to
• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its
Menus or displays do not appear on the the disc.
edge. Do not touch the surface. Dust,
screen. fingerprints, or scratches on the disc may cause
, While the recorder is reading disc information, The disc tray does not open and “TRAY it to malfunction.
the System Menu, TOOLS menu, or information LOCKED” appears in the front panel display.
display will not appear. , Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized
Sony service facility.
“- -:- -” appears in the front panel display.
, Set the clock again (page 100). “CAN NOT RECORD BECAUSE OF HIGH TEMP.”
appears in the front panel display.
The c indicator is flashing. , Check that the vent on the rear of the recorder is • Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat
, The disc does not have enough space. not blocked. Then, turn off the recorder, wait sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it in a car
Additional Information

, Insert a recordable disc or a tape with its safety until the clock appears in the front panel display, parked in direct sunlight as the temperature may
tab in place inside the recorder. and disconnect the mains lead. Leave the rise considerably inside the car.
recorder off for a while, then re-connect the • After playing, store the disc in its case.
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the
Remote control mains lead, and press "/1 on the recorder.
disc from the centre out.
The remote does not function.
“CHILD LOCK” appears in the front panel
, Batteries are weak.
, The remote is too far from the recorder.
display.
, The remote’s manufacturer code returned to the , The recorder is locked. Cancel the Child Lock
default setting when you replaced the batteries. (page 39).
Reset the code (page 20).
, Turn on the recorder. • Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner,
, The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on commercially available disc/lens cleaners, or
the recorder. anti static spray intended for vinyl LPs.
, Different command modes are set for the • Do not use the following discs.
recorder and remote. Set the same command – A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g.,
mode (page 25). card, heart).
, Slide the TV/DVD·VIDEO switch to – A disc with a label or sticker on it.
DVD·VIDEO (page 20).

113 114

1-27
 i.LINK baud rate
About i.LINK Guide to Parts and Controls
i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies according to
The DV IN jack on this recorder is an i.LINK- the equipment. Three maximum baud rates are For more information, see the pages in parentheses.
compliant DV IN jack. This section describes the defined:
S100 (approx. 100 Mbps*)
i.LINK standard and its features.
S200 (approx. 200 Mbps)
Front panel
What is i.LINK? S400 (approx. 400 Mbps) Buttons on the recorder have the same function as the buttons on the remote if they have the same or
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling similar names.
digital video, digital audio and other data in two The baud rate is listed under “Specifications” in
directions between equipment having the i.LINK the instruction manual of each equipment. It is
jack, and for controlling other equipment. also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some
i.LINK-compatible pieces of equipment can be equipment.
connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it
applications are operations and data transactions is not indicated such as this unit is “S100.”
with various digital AV equipment. When two or When units are connected to equipment having a
more i.LINK-compatible equipment are different maximum baud rate, the baud rate
connected to this recorder in a daisy chain, sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.
Open the
operations and data transactions are possible with cover
not only the equipment that this recorder is * What is Mbps?
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of
connected to but also with other devices via the
data that can be sent or received in one second. For A "/1 (on/standby) button (22) J SELECT DVD/VIDEO buttons (34, 48, 70,
directly connected equipment. example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps means that 100
Note, however, that the method of operation megabits of data can be sent in one second. B Disc tray (34, 48, 87) 77)
sometimes varies according to the characteristics K (remote sensor) (19)
and specifications of the equipment to be C A (open/close) button (35, 48, 87)
connected, and that operations and data
i.LINK functions on this recorder L Front panel display (46, 74)
D DVD t button (88)
transactions are sometimes not possible on some For details on how to dub when this recorder is T VIDEO button (87) M SYNCHRO REC indicator (54, 82)
connected equipment. connected to other video equipment having DV
jacks, see page 93. E Tape compartment (70, 77) N PROGRESSIVE indicator (16, 102)
Note The DV jack on this recorder can only input DVC- F A (eject) button (70) O PROGRAM/TRACKING +/– buttons*
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected SD signals. It cannot output signals. The DV jack (20, 48, 71, 77)
to this recorder by the i.LINK cable (DV connecting will not accept MICRO MV signals from G z REC (record) button (48, 77)
cable). When connecting this recorder to i.LINK- equipment such as a MICRO MV digital video H m/M (rewind/fast-forward) buttons P DV IN jack (93)
compatible equipment having two or more i.LINK jacks camera with an i.LINK jack. (37) Q LINE 2 IN (S VIDEO/t (video)/o
(DV jacks), see the instruction manual of the equipment
Additional Information

For further precautions, see the notes on page 93.

to be connected. I H (play) button (34, 70)* (audio) L/R) jacks (26)
For details on precautions when connecting this
recorder, also see the instruction manuals for the * H and PROGRAM + buttons have a tactile dot. Use
X (pause) button (35, 48, 72, 77)
About the name “i.LINK” equipment to be connected. the tactile dot as a reference.
x (stop) button (34, 48, 70, 77)
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data
transport bus proposed by SONY, and is a Required i.LINK cable
trademark approved by many corporations. Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during
IEEE 1394 is an international standard DV dubbing).
standardized by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers. i.LINK and are trademarks.

117 118

C ?/1 (on/standby) button (22)

Remote
D PROG (programme) +/– buttons* (20, 48)
For DVD functions Buttons with an orange dot next to them can be E 2 (volume) +/– buttons (20)
used with your TV when the TV/DVD·VIDEO
switch is set to TV. F t TV/VIDEO button (20)
A TV/DVD·VIDEO switch (20) G INPUT SELECT button (48, 57, 94)
B Z (open/close) button (34, 48) wj SUR (surround) button (35)
C DVD button (34, 48) wk SYSTEM MENU button (10)
TITLE LIST button (39, 59)
D Number buttons*1(20, 52)
TIMER button (50)
SET button*2
wl MENU button (34)
E CLEAR / -/-- (ten digit) button (41)
e; TOOLS button (11, 40)
F (audio) button (35)*1
(subtitle) button (35) ea (replay)/ (advance) buttons (35)
G ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST button (39, 59) es H (play) button* (34)
H DISPLAY button (45) ed x (stop) button (34, 48)
TIME/TEXT button (46) ef X (pause) button (48)
I TOP MENU button (34) eg CHAPTER MARK/CHAPTER MARK
J M/m/</,/ENTER button (22) ERASE buttons (62)
K O RETURN button (22) eh (wide mode) button (20)
L . (previous)/> (next) ej ONE TOUCH DUBBING button (96)
buttons (35) ek COMMAND MODE switch (DVD 1, 2, 3)
Mm / M (search) buttons (35) (25)
N ZOOM button (35)
* PROG + and H buttons have a tactile dot. Use the
O z REC (record) button (48) tactile dot as a reference.

P REC MODE button (48, 94)

Q SYNCHRO REC button (54)
Additional Information

R (angle) button (35)

S REPEAT button (35) Slide the cover

T MARKER button (41)

U SEARCH button (41)
Slide the cover
*1
Number 5 and buttons have a tactile dot. Use
the tactile dot as a reference.
*2 SET button does not work for this model.

,continued 119 120

1-28
For VCR functions A TV/DVD·VIDEO switch (20)
Front panel display
B Z (eject) button (70)
C Number buttons (20, 81) *1

SET button*2
D CLEAR / -/-- (ten digit) button (70)
DVD RW VR VCD TV STEREO VIDEO
E (audio) button*1 (75)
F DISPLAY button (74)
TIME/TEXT button (74)
G SYSTEM MENU button (10)
H O RETURN button (22)
A DVD playing/recording status I Timer indicator
I . (previous)/> (next)
buttons (72) B Disc type/recording format J Displays the following (46, 74):
• Playing time/remaining time
J (search) buttons (72) C Audio signal indicators
• Current title/chapter/track/index number
K z REC (record) button (77) D TV indicator (20) • Recording time/recording mode
• Clock
L REC MODE button (77) E STEREO indicator (47)
• Programme position
M SYNCHRO REC button (82) F NICAM indicator (47)
K (angle) indicator (35)
N ?/1 (on/standby) button (22) G VIDEO playing/recording status
L Disc indicator
O VIDEO button (70, 77) H Tape indicator
P PROG (programme)/TRACKING +/–
buttons*1(20, 71, 77) Rear panel
Q 2 (volume) +/– buttons (20)
R t TV/VIDEO button (20)
S INPUT SELECT button (77, 85)
T TIMER button (79)
U M/m/</,/ENTER button (22)
Additional Information
V TOOLS button (73)
W (replay)/ (advance) buttons (72)
Slide the cover X H (play) button*1 (70) A i LINE 3/DECODER jack (28) F DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) jack
Y x (stop) button (70, 77) B AUDIO OUT L/R jacks (17) (17)

Z X (pause) button (72, 77) C AERIAL IN/OUT jacks (13) G i LINE 1-TV jack (15)

wj (wide mode) button (20) D LINE 2 OUT (VIDEO/AUDIO L/R) jacks H DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack
(14, 16) (17)
wk COMMAND MODE switch (DVD 1, 2, 3)
(25) E COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y, PB/CB, I S VIDEO OUT jack (14)
*1 Number 5, , PROG +, and H buttons have a PR/CR) jacks (16)
tactile dot. Use the tactile dot as a reference.
*2 SET button does not work for this model.

,continued 121 122

DVD-RW (page 30) Interlace format

Glossary A DVD-RW is a recordable and rewritable disc Interlace format shows every other line of an DVD Audio/Subtitle
that is the same size as a DVD VIDEO. The DVD- image as a single “field” and is the standard
Chapter (page 40) RW has two different modes: VR mode and Video method for displaying images on television. The Language
Sections of a picture or a music feature that are mode. DVDs created in Video mode have the even number field shows the even numbered lines
smaller than titles. A title is composed of several same format as a DVD VIDEO, while discs of an image, and the odd numbered field shows the When you play a DVD VIDEO, the language of
chapters. Depending on the disc, no chapters may created in VR (Video Recording) mode allow the odd numbered lines of an image. the selected audio track or subtitle is abbreviated
be recorded. contents to be programmed or edited. as follows. See page 106 to change the audio track
Original (page 58) or subtitle.
Copy protection signals (page 48) DVD+R (page 30) Titles actually recorded on a DVD-RW (VR ARA Arabic ITA Italian
Copy restriction set by copyright owners, etc. A DVD+R (read “plus R”) is a recordable disc that mode). Erasing original titles frees up disc space.
is the same size as a DVD VIDEO. Contents can BUL Bulgarian IWR Hebrew
These signals are included in some software or TV
programs and restrict recording on this recorder. be recorded only once to a DVD+R, and will have Playlist (page 58) CHI Chinese JPN Japanese
the same format as a DVD VIDEO. Playback information created from the actual CRO Croatian KOR Korean
Dolby Digital (page 103) recordings on a DVD-RW (VR mode). A Playlist
DVD-R (page 30) leaves the original titles as they are, and contains CZE Czech MAL Malay
Digital audio compression technology developed
by Dolby Laboratories. This technology conforms A DVD-R is a recordable disc that is the same size only the information needed to control playback. DAN Danish NLD Dutch
to multi-channel surround sound. The rear channel as a DVD VIDEO. Contents can be recorded only A Playlist title takes up very little disc space.
once to a DVD-R, and will have the same format DEU German NOR Norwegian
is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel
in this format. Dolby Digital provides the same as a DVD VIDEO. Progressive format (page 102) ENG English POL Polish
discrete channels of high quality digital audio Compared to the Interlace format that alternately
ESP Spanish POR Portuguese
found in “Dolby Digital” theater surround sound DVD VIDEO (page 32) shows every other line of an image (field) to create
systems. Good channel separation is realized A disc that contains up to eight hours of moving one frame, the Progressive format shows the entire FIN Finish RUS Russian
because all of the channel data is recorded pictures on a disc the same diameter as a CD. image at once as a single frame. This means that
FRA French SVE Swedish
discretely, and little deterioration occurs because The data capacity of a single-layer and single- while the Interlace format can show 30 frames/60
all channel data processing is digital. sided DVD is 4.7 GB (Giga Byte), which is 7 fields in one second, the Progressive format can GRE Greek THA Thai
times that of a CD. The data capacity of a double- show 60 frames in one second. The overall picture
HUN Hungarian TUR Turkish
DTS (page 103) layer and single-sided DVD is 8.5 GB, a single- quality increases and still images, text, and
Digital audio compression technology by Digital layer and double-sided DVD is 9.4 GB, and horizontal lines appear sharper. IDN Indonesian VIE Vietnamese
Theater Systems, Inc. This technology conforms double-layer and double-sided DVD is 17 GB.
IND Hindi ZAF Afrikaans
to multi-channel surround sound. The rear channel The picture data uses the MPEG 2 format, which Title (page 40)
is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel is a worldwide standard of digital compression The longest section of a picture or music feature ISL Icelandic
in this format. DTS provides the same discrete technology. The picture data is compressed to on a DVD, movie, etc., in video software, or the
channels of high quality digital audio. about 1/40 (average) of its original size. The DVD
Additional Information

entire album in audio software.

Good channel separation is realized because all of also uses a variable rate coding technology that
the channel data is recorded discretely, and little changes the data to be allocated according to the
status of the picture. Audio information is Track (page 40)
deterioration occurs because all channel data Sections of a music feature on a CD (the length of
processing is digital. recorded in a multi-channel format, such as Dolby
Digital, allowing you to enjoy a more real audio a song).
presence.
DVD+RW (page 30)
Furthermore, various advanced functions such as
A DVD+RW (read “plus RW”) is a recordable and the multi-angle, multilingual, and Parental
rewritable disc. DVD+RWs use a recording Control functions are provided on the DVD.
format that is comparable to the DVD VIDEO
format.

,continued 123 124

1-29
 “Component Out” 102 DVD-R 30, 123 LP mode 76 “Progressive” 102 Synchro Rec 54, 82, 106
Index COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DVD-RW 30, 123 Progressive format 124 System Menu 10
16 M “Protect” 60
Words in quotations appear in Connecting E Mains lead 19 T
the on-screen displays. the aerial cable 13 Easy Setup 22, 108 Manual clock set 100 Q “Tape Length” 105
the audio cords 17 “Edit” 56, 84 “Manual Set” 98 Quick Timer 49, 77 Tape speed 76
to your TV 14 “Edit Playlist” 66 MARKER 41 TIME/TEXT 46
Numerics
16:9 23, 101
Controlling TVs with the “Edit Scene” 66 MENU 34 R TIMER 51, 79
4:3 Letter Box 23, 101
remote 20 Enter characters 63 Menu Rear panel 122 Timer List 55, 84
Copy protection 48, 123 EP mode 70 Top menu 34 REC 49, 77 Timer recording 50, 79
4:3 Pan Scan 23, 101
Copy-Free 48 “Erase” 60, 67 “Modify” 67 REC MODE 49 change/cancel 55, 84
Copy-Never 48 “Erase All Titles” 69 “Move” 68 Recording 47, 76 Manual setting 50, 79
A Copy-Once 48 Erasing MP3 audio tracks 42 recordable discs 30 VIDEO Plus+ 52, 81
“A-B Erase” 60 Counter 70 A-B Erase 60 MPEG 103 recording format 30 Title 40, 124
“Add” 68 CPRM 30 all titles 69 recording mode 47 Title List 39, 59
Aerial 13 “Create Playlist” 64 chapters 60 N tape speed 76 “Title Name” 60, 66
Album 42 Creating chapters 50, 62
Angle 35
titles 60 NICAM 47, 76 while watching another TOOLS 11
“Audio” 106 Number buttons 20, 40, 52, programme TOP MENU 34
D F 81 49, 77 Track 40, 124
Audio 35
DATA CD 32, 42 “Factory Setting” 108 Recording mode 47 Tracking 71
“Audio DRC” 104
DATA DVD 32, 42 Fast forward 36, 72 O Recording time 47, 50, 76 Troubleshooting 109
“Audio” setup 103
“Del” 56, 84 Fast reverse 36, 72 One Touch Dubbing 96 Region code 33 Tuner Preset 22
“Auto Adjust” 100
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT 17 “Features” setup 105 On-screen display Remaining time 78 “Tuner Preset” setup 98
Auto Clock Set 100
“Digital Out” 103 “Format DVD” 105 Setup Display 97 Remote 19, 119 “TV Type” 101
“Auto Play” 105
Digital video camera 93 “Front Display” 107 Sub-menu 11 REPEAT 37 TV/DVD·VIDEO switch 20
“Auto Preset” 98
“Disc Finalize” 69, 92 Front panel 118 System Menu 10 Repeat A-B Play 38 TV/VIDEO 20, 49, 77
“Auto Repeat” 105
“Disc Format” 69 Front panel display 122 TOOLS menu 11 Resetting 108
B
“Disc Information” 69 “Options” setup 106 Resume Play 38 U
“Disc Menu” 106 H Original 40, 124 “RGB” 23, 101 “Unfinalize” 92
Batteries 19 “Disc Name” 69
Bilingual recording 47, 76 Handling discs 114 ORIGINAL/PLAYLIST 40, Rotate 44 Unrecordable pictures 48
“Disc Protect” 69 58
Bookmark 41 Disc types 30
I “OSD” language 22, 106 S V
Display
C i.LINK 93, 117 S VIDEO 14 “VCR Function” 105
front panel display 122 “Video” 23, 101
Changing/cancelling timer INPUT SELECT 57, 85, 94 P Safety tab 76
Setup Display 97 “Scan Audio” 38, 104 VIDEO CD 32
settings (Timer List) 55, 84 Interlace format 124 “Parental” 107
“Divide Title” 61 Searching Video mode 30
Parental Control 38
Channel List 99 Dolby Digital 24, 103, 123 “Chapter” 40 VIDEO Plus+ 52, 81
Chapter 40, 123 “Downmix” 104 J PBC 38
JPEG image files 43 PDC 52, 80 “End Search” 73 “Video” setup 101
CHAPTER MARK 62 DTS 24, 37, 103, 123 “Go To Zero” 73 VR mode 30
“Picture Control” 101
CHAPTER MARK ERASE “Dubbing” 87, 89 Inrto Scan 73
L Playable discs 32
62 “DV Audio Input” 95, 104
Child Lock 39 “Language” 106 Playback 34, 70 Time Search 40 Z
“DV Dubbing” 95 “Title” 40
Cleaning discs 114 Language abbreviation 124 MP3 audio tracks 42 ZOOM 35
DV IN 93 “Track” 40
Cleaning the video heads 114 “Line 1 Output” 101 Repeat play 37 Zoom 44
“DVD Auto Chapter” 105 Settings 97
Clock 22 LINE 1-TV 15 Resume Play 38
“DVD Bilingual Rec.” 106 Setup Display 97
Slow-motion play 36
“Clock Set” setup 100 DVD VIDEO 32, 123 LINE 2 IN 26
Colour systems 105, 116 Playlist 40, 64, 124 SP mode 76
DVD+R 30, 123 LINE 3/DECODER 28
Sub-menu 11
“Combine Titles” 66 “Line Audio Input” 54, 57, “Present Time” 100
DVD+R DL 30 Subtitle 35, 106
“Command Mode” 25, 107 Programme Dubbing 89
DVD+RW 30, 123 104
Surround 36
,continued 125 126

1-30E
 RDR-VX410

2. DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

2-1 CABINET AND PCB
2-1-1 Cabinet Top Removal 2-1-3 Ass’y Front Panel Removal

1 REMOVE 2 SCREW

3 Lift up the Cabinet Top

in the direction of arrow

2 REMOVE 1 REMOVE
3 SCREWS 2 SCREW
1 RELEASE 3 HOOKS
(Top View)

Fig. 2-1 Cabinet Top Removal

2-1-2 Bottom Cover Removal

1 REMOVE
2 RELEASE 3 HOOKS
8 SCREWS
(Bottom View)

Fig. 2-3 Ass’y Front Panel Removal

2 RELEASE 3 HOOKS

2-1-4 Function Timer PCB Removal

Fig. 2-2 Bottom Cover Removal

1 RELEASE 1 HOOK

Fig. 2-4 Function Timer PCB Removal

2-1
2-1-5 Chassis Removal
3 REMOVE 4 SCREWS 2 REMOVE 4 SCREWS

1 REMOVE 2 SCREWS
VCR DECK
DVD DECK
5 REMOVE 5
SCREWS

6 REMOVE 2 SURPORTER
VCR MAIN PCB

4 REMOVE 7
SCREWS

DVD MAIN PCB

FUNCTION TIMER PCB

Fig. 2-5 Chassis Removal

2-1-6 VCR Main PCB Removal

1 REMOVE 3 SCREWS

When installing the ass'y full deck on the Main PCB,

be sure to align the assembly point of mode switch.

MODE SWITCH

ASSEMBLY POINT

Fig. 2-6 VCR Main PCB Removal

2-2
2-2 CIRCUIT BOARD LOCATIONS

VCR MAIN PCB

FUNCTION TIMER PCB

DVD MAIN PCB

Fig. 2-7 Circuit Board Locations

2-3
2-3 VCR DECK PARTS LOCATIONS
2-3-1 Top View

1 2

3 4 5 6

Fig. 2-8 Top parts Location-1

1 GEAR FL CAM
2 MOTOR LOADING ASS’Y
3 LEVER FL ARM ASS’Y
4 HOLDER FL CASSETTE ASS’Y
5 LEVER FL DOOR
6 SLIDER FL DRIVE

2-4
 1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 0 qa 0 qs qd
Fig. 2-9 Top Parts Location-2

1 FE HEAD 8 DISK S REEL

2 CYLINDER ASS’Y 9 LEVER S BRAKE ASS’Y
3 ACE HEAD ASS’Y 0 GEAR IDLE
4 LEVER UNIT PINCH ASS’Y qa LEVER IDLE
5 LEVER #9 GUIDE ASS’Y qs LEVER T BRAKE ASS’Y
6 LEVER TENSION ASS’Y qd DISK T REEL
7 BAND BRAKE ASS’Y

2-5
2-3-2 Bottom View

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 0
Fig. 2-10 Bottom Parts Location

1 GEAR JOINT 1
2 GEAR JOINT 2
3 BRAKET GEAR
4 MOTOR CAPSTAN ASS’Y
5 LEVER T LOAD ASS’Y
6 GEAR LOADING DRIVE
7 LEVER S LOAD ASS’Y
8 HOLDER CLUTCH ASS’Y
9 BELT PULLEY
0 SLIDER CAM

2-6
2-4 VCR DECK
2-4-1 Holder FL Cassette Ass’y Removal 2-4-2 Lever FL Arm Ass’y Removal
1) Pull the Holder FL Cassette Ass’y 1 to the eject position. 1) Push the hole “A” in the direction of arrow “B” use the pin.(about
2) Pull the Holder FL Cassette Ass’y 1 as grasping the Holder FL Dia. 2.5)
Cassette Ass’y 1 and Lever FL Cassette-R 2 in the same time 2) Pull out the Lever FL Arm Ass’y 1 from the Boss of Main
to release hooking from Main Base until the Boss [A] of Holder Base.
FL Cassette Ass’y 1 is taken out from the Rail [B]. 3) Remove the Lever FL Arm Ass’y 1 in the direction of arrow
3) Lift the Holder FL Cassette Ass’y 1, in this time, you have to “C”.
grasp the Lever FL Cassette-R 2 Continuously until the Holder
FL Cassette Ass’y 1 is taken out completely.

Note: Be sure to insert Lever FL Cassette-R 2 in the direction of

“A” to prevent separation and breakage of the Lever FL Cassette- HOLE "A"
R 2 at disassembling and reassembling.
PIN

"B"

"C"

1 LEVER FL ARM ASS'Y

Fig. 2-12 Lever FL Arm Ass’y Removal

1 HOLDER FL RAIL [B]
CASSETTEE ASS'Y
"A" 2 LEVER FL CASSETTEE -R
BOSS [A]

Fig. 2-11 Holder FL Cassette Ass’y Removal

2-7
2-4-3 Lever FL Door Removal 2-4-4 Slider FL Drive, Gear FL Cam Removal
1) Release the Hook 2 and Remove the Lever FL Door 1 in the 1) Pull the Slider FL Drive 1 to the front direction.
direction of arrow “A”. 2) Remove the Slider FL Drive 1 in the direction of arrow. (Refer
to Fig. 2-14)
3) Remove the Gear FL cam 2.

Note: When reinstalling be sure to reassemble Slider FL drive 1

after you insert the Boss of Lever FL ARM-R in Groove of Slider
FL drive 1.

Assembly: Align the Gear FL Cam 1 with the Gear worm wheel
Post as shown drawing.
(Refer to Timing point)

2 LEVER FL DOOR

"A"
1 SLIDER FL DRIVE
"B"
"C"

Fig. 2-13 Lever FL Door Removal

2 GEAR FL CAM

1 SLIDER FL DRIVE

Fig. 2-14 Slider FL Drive Removal

1 GEAR FL CAM
GEAR WORM WHEEL

POST

TIMING POINT

Fig. 2-15 Gear FL Cam, Gear Worm

2-8
2-4-5 Gear Worm Wheel Removal 2-4-6 Cable Flat Removal

1) Remove the Gear Worm wheel 1. 1) Remove the Drum connecting part of Cable Flat 1 from
Connector Waffer 2.

2 CONNECTOR WAFER
1 CABLE FLAT

1 GEAR WORM WHEEL

Fig. 2-16 Gear Worm Wheel Removal Fig. 2-17 Cable Flat Removal

2-9
2-4-7 Motor Loading Ass’y Removal 2-4-8 Bracket Gear, Gear Joint 2, 1 Removal

1) Remove the screw 1. 1) Remove the SCREW 1.

2) Remove the Motor Loading Ass’y 2. 2) Remove the Bracket Gear 2.
3) Remove the Gear Joint 2 3.
4) Remove the Gear Joint 1 4.

Assembly:
1) Be sure to align dot mark of Gear Joint 1 1 with dot mark of
Gear Joint 2 2 as shown Fig 2-20.
(Refer to Timing point1)
2) Confirm the Timing Point 2 of the Gear Joint 2 2 and Slider
Cam 3.

4 GEAR JOINT 1

3 GEAR JOINT 2
1 SCREW
2 MOTOR LOADING ASS`Y
2 BRAKET GEAR

1 SCREW

Fig.2-18 Motor Loading Ass’y Removal

Fig. 2-19 Bracket Gear, Gear Joint 1,2 Removal

1 GEAR JOINT1

2 GEAR JOINT2
3 SLIDER CAM

TIMING POINT 1 TIMING POINT 2

Fig. 2-20 Gear Joint 1,2 Assembly

2-10
2-4-9 Gear Loading Drive, Slider Cam, 2-4-10 Gear Loading Drive, Slider Cam,
Lever Load S, T Ass’y Removal Lever Load S, T Ass’y Assembly
1) Remove the Belt Pulley. (Refer to Fig. 2-38) 1) When reinstalling, be sure to align dot of Lever Load T Ass’y
2) Remove the Gear Loading Drive 1 after releasing Hook [A] in 1 with dot of Lever Load S Ass’y 2 as shown in drawing,
the direction arrow as shown in detail drawing. (Refer to Timing Point 1).
3) Remove the Slider Cam 2. 2) Insert the Pin A,B,C,D into the Slider Cam 3 hole,
4) Remove the Lever Load S Ass’y 3 & Lever Load T Ass’y 4. 3) Be sure to align dot of Lever Load T 1 and dot of Gear Loading
Drive 4, (Refer to Timing Point 2).
4) Aline dot of Gear Loading drive 4 with mark of Slider Cam 3
as shown in drawing (Refer to Timing Point 3).
HOOK(A)
1 GEAR LOADING DRIVE
TIMING POINT 1
2 SLIDE CAM 1 LEVER LOAD T 2 LEVER LOAD S
4 LEVER LOAD T ASS'Y
3 LEVER LOAD S ASS'Y

TIMING POINT 2

TIMING POINT 3

Fig. 2-21 Gear Loading Drive, Slider Cam,

Lever T, S Load Ass’y Removal
PIN A PIN C PIN D PIN B
3 SLIDER CAM

Fig. 2-22 Gear Loading Drive, Slider Cam,

Lever Load S, T Ass’y Assembly

2-11
2-4-11 Lever Pinch Drive, 2-4-12 Lever Tension Ass’y,
Lever Tension Drive Removal Band Brake Ass’y Removal
1) Remove the Lever Pinch Drive 1, Lever Tension Drive 2. 1) Remove the Lever Brake S Ass’y (Refer to Fig 2-25).
2) Remove the Spring Tension Lever 1.
3) Rotate stopper of Main Base in the direction of arrow “A”.
1 LEVER PINCH DRIVE 4) Lift the Lever Tension Ass’y 2 & Band brake Ass’y 3.

Note:
2 LEVER TENSION DRIVE
1) When replacing the Lever Tension Ass’y 2, be sure to apply
Grease on the post,
2) Take care not to touch stain on the felt side, and not to be folder
and broken Band brake Ass’y
3) After Lever Tension Ass’y seated, Rotate stopper of Main Base
to the Mark[B].

3 BAND BRAKE ASS`Y

2 LEVER TENTION ASS`Y

1 SPRING TENTION LEVER

STOPPER
"A"
Fig. 2-23 Lever Pinch Drive, MARK[B]

Lever Tension Drive Removal

Fig. 2-24 Lever Tension Ass’y,

Band Brake Ass’y Removal

2-12
2-4-13 Lever Brake S, T Ass’y Removal 2-4-14 Gear Idle Ass’y Removal
1) Release the Hook [A] and the Hook [B], [C] in the direction of 1) Push the Lever Idle 1 in the direction of arrow “A”, “B”.
arrow as shown in Fig 2-25. 2) Lift the Lever Idle 1.
2) Lift the Lever S, T Brake Ass’y 1, 2 with spring brake 3.
Assembly:
Assembly: 1) Apply oil in two Bosses of Lever Idle 1.
1) Assembly the Lever S Brake Ass’y 1 on the Main Base. 2) Assemble the Gear Idle 2 with the Lever Idle 1.
2) Assembly the Lever T Brake Ass’y 2 with spring brake 3.
Note: When replacing the Gear Idle 2, be sure to add oil in the
boss of Lever Idle 1.
Note: Take extreme care not to be folded and
transformed Spring Brake at removing or reinstalling.
"A"

1 LEVER IDLE
HOOK(A) 2 GEAR IDLE "B"
HOOK "C" 2 GEAR IDLE

3 SPRING BRAKE

1 LEVER S BRAKE ASS'Y HOOK(C)

HOOK(B)
2 LEVER T BRAKE ASS`Y

Fig. 2-26 Gear Idle Ass’y Removal

Fig. 2-25 Lever Brake S, T Ass’y Removal

2-13
2-4-15 Disk S, T Reel Removal 2-4-16 Holder Clutch Ass’y Removal
1) Lift the Disk S, T Reel 1, 2. 1) Remove the Washer Slit 1.
2) Lift the Holder Clutch Ass’y 2.

Note: When you reinstall Holder Clutch Ass’y

1 DISK S REEL
1) Check the condition of spring as shown in detail A.
2) Don't push Holder Clutch Ass’y down with excessive force Just
insert Holder Clutch Ass’y into post center with dead force and
2 DISK T REEL Rotate it smoothly.
Be sure to confirm that spring is in the slit of Gear Center Ass’y
as shown in detail B.

1 WASHER SLIT

2 HOLDER CLUTCH ASS`Y

Fig. 2-27 Disk S, T Reel Removal

DETAIL A

<BAD> SPRING <GOOD>

DETAIL B
SPRING

<BAD> <GOOD>

Fig. 2-28 Holder Clutch Ass’y Removal

2-14
2-4-17 Lever Up Down Ass’y, Gear Center 2-4-18 Guide Cassette Door Removal
Ass’y Removal
1) Lift the Hook [A].
1) Remove the 2 hooks in the direction of arrow as shown Fig. 2- 2) Rotate the Guide Cassette Door 1 in the direction of arrow.
29 and lift the Lever Up Down Ass’y 1.
2) Lift the Gear Center Ass’y 2. Note: After reinstalling the Guide Cassette Door 1 sure the Hook
[A].
Assembly:
1) Insert the Lever Up Down Ass’y 1 in the rectangular holes on
Main Base as shown in Fig 2-30.
2) Lift the Lever Up Down Ass’y 1 about 35°. 1 GUIDE CASSETTE DOOR
(Refer to Fig 2-30)
3) Insert Ring of the Gear Center Ass’y 2 in the Guide of the
Lever Up Down Ass’y 1.
4) Insert the Gear Center Ass’y 2 in the post on Main Base.
HOOK [A]
5) Push down the Lever Up Down Ass’y 1 for locking of the Hook.

Note:
1) Take care not to separate and sentence does not mark sense.
2) Be sure to confirm that Ring of the Gear Center Ass’y 2 is in
the Guide of the Lever Up Down Ass’y 1 after finishing
assembly of Lever Up Down Ass’y 1 and Gear Center Ass’y
2.

1 LEVER UP DOWN ASS`Y

2 GEAR CENTER ASS`Y

Fig. 2-31 Guide Cassette Door Removal

Fig. 2-29 Lever Up Down Ass’y Removal

GEAR CENTER ASS'Y

GUIDE

LEVER UP DOWN ASS'Y

RING
GEAR
POST 35
HOOK

MAIN BASE

Fig. 2-30 Lever Up Down Ass’y Removal

2-15
2-4-19 Lever Unit Pinch Ass’y, Plate Joint, 2-4-20 Lever #9 Guide Ass’y Removal
Spring Pinch Drive Removal
1) Remove the Spring #9 Guide 1.
1) Lift the Unit Pinch Ass’y 1. 2) Lift the Spring #9 Guide Ass’y 2 in the direction of arrow “A”.
2) Remove the Plate Joint 2 from Lever Pinch Drive.
3) Remove the Spring Pinch Drive 3. Note:
1) Take extreme care not to get grease on the tape Guide Post.
Note: 2) After reinstalling, check the bottom side of the Post #9 Guide to
1) Take extreme care not to touch the grease on the Roller Pinch. the top side of Main Base.
2) When reinstalling, be sure to apply grease on the post pinch
roller. "A"

1 SPRING #9 GUIDE
1 LEVER UNIT PINCH ASS`Y
2 LEVER #9 GUIDE ASS`Y

"B"

2 PLATE JOINT

3 SPRING PINCH DRIVE

Fig. 2-33 Lever #9 Guide Ass’y Removal

Fig. 2-32 Lever Unit Pinch Ass’y, Plate Joint,

Spring Pinch Drive Removal

2-16
2-4-21 FE Head Removal 2-4-22 ACE Head Removal
1) Rotate the FE Head 1 in the direction of arrow to lift up. 1) Pull out the FPC from connector of ACE Head Ass’y 2.
2) Remove the screw 1.
3) Lift the ACE Head Ass’y 2.

1 SCREW
1 FE HEAD

2 HEAD ACE ASS`Y

Fig. 2-34 FE Head Removal

Fig. 2-35 ACE Head Removal

2-17
2-4-23 Slider S, T Ass’y Removal 2-4-24 Plate Ground Deck, Cylinder Ass’y Re-
moval
1) Move the Slider S, T Ass’y 1, 2 to slot, and then lift it to
remove. (Refer to arrow) 1) Remove the 3 Screws 1.
2) Lift the Plate Ground Deck 2.
3) Lift the Cylinder Ass’y 3.
1 SLIDER S ASS`Y
Assembly:
1) Match the 3 holes in the bottom of Cylinder Ass’y 3 to the 3
2 SLIDER T ASS`Y
holes of Main Base as attending not to drop or knock the Cylinder
Ass’y 3.
2) Tighten the 1 Screw 1.
3) Match the Plate Ground Deck 2 to the Hole of Base Main.
4) Tighten the other 2 Screws 1.

Note:
1) Take care not to touch the Cylinder Ass’y 3 and the tape guide
post at reinstalling.
2) When reinstalling, Don't push down too much on Screw Driver.

1 3 SCREWS

2 PLATE GROUND DECK

Fig. 2-36 Slider S, T Ass’y Removal

3 CYLINDER ASS'Y

Fig. 2-37 Plate Ground Deck, Cylinder Ass’y Removal

2-18
2-4-25 Hook Capstan, Belt Pulley Removal 2-4-26 Motor Capstan Ass’y Removal
1) Remove the Hook Capstan 1 after realeasing Hook in the 1) Remove the 3 Screws 1.
direction arrow as shown in detail drawing. 2) Remove the Motor Capstan Ass’y 2.
2) Remove the Belt Pulley 2.
Assembly:
Note: Take extreme care not to get grease on Belt Pulley 2 at 1) Match the 3 holes of Motor Capstan Ass’y 2 to the 3 holes of
assembling or reassembling. Main Base. Be careful not to drop or knock the Motor Capstan
Ass’y 2.
2) Tighten the 3 Screws 1 in the direction of arrow as shown detail
drawing.

Note: After tightening screws, check if there is gap between the

head of screws and the top side of Main Base. There should have no
gap between the head of screws and the top side of Main Base.
HOOK After reinstalling, adjusting the tape transport
2 BELT PULLEY system again.

1 HOOK CAPSTAN 1 3 SCREWS

C A

Fig. 2-38 Belt Pulley Removal

2 MOTOR CAPSTAN ASS'Y

Fig. 2-39 Motor Capstan Ass’y Removal

2-19
2-4-27 Post #8 Guide Ass’y Removal 2-4-29 How to Eject the Cassette Tape
(If the tape is stuck in the unit)
1) Rotate the Post #8 Guide Ass’y 1 in the direction of arrow to
lift up. 1) Turn the Gear worm 1 clockwise with screw driver.(Refer to
arrow)
(Other method: Remove the Screw of Motor Load Ass’y,
Separate the Motor Load Ass’y)
1 POST #8 GUIDE ASS'Y

1 GEAR WORM

Fig. 2-40 Post #8 Guide Ass’y Removal Fig. 2-42

2) When Slider S,T are approched in the position of unloading,

2-4-28 Level Head Cleaner Ass’y Removal rotate holder Clutch counterclockwise after inserting screw driver
in the hole of frame's bottom in order to wind the unwinded
tape.
1) Release the Hook 1.
(Refer to Fig.2-43)
2) Lift the Lever Head Cleaner Ass’y 2.
(If you rotate Gear Worm 1 continuously when tape is in state
of unwinding, you may cause a tape contamination by grease
2 LEVER HEAD CLEANER ASS'Y and tape damage.
Be sure to wind the unwinded tape in the state of set horizently.)
3) Rotate Gear Worm 1 clockwise using screw driver again up to
the state of eject mode and then pick out the tape.(Refer to Fig.2-
1 HOOK 42)

SLEEVE-HEAD CLEANER

FRAME

Fig. 2-43

Fig. 2-41 Lever Head Cleaner Ass’y Removal

2-20
2-5 THE TABLE OF CLEANING, LUBRICATION AND REPLACEMENT TIME ABOUT PRINCIPAL
PARTS
1) The replacement time of parts is not life of parts.
2) The table 2-1 is that the VCR Set is in normal condition (normal temperature, normal humidity).
The checking period may be changed owing to the condition of use, runtime and environmental conditions.
3) Life of the Cylinder Ass’y is depend on the condition of use.
4) See exploded view for location of each parts.

<Table 2-1>
Checking Period
* Parts Name Remark
500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
POST TENSION ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ - To clean the parts, use patch and
SLANT POST S, T ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ alcohol (solvent).
T #8 GUIDE SHAFT ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
- After cleaning, use the video tape
A CAPSTAN SHAFT ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ after alcohol is gone away
P
E #9 GUIDE POST ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ completely.
#3 GUIDE POST ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆
P - We recommend to use oil [EP-50]
A GUIDE ROLLER S, T ∆ ∆ ∆ O O O O O O O
or solvent.
T CYLINDER ASS’Y ∆ O O O O O O O O O
H
FE HEAD ∆ ∆ ∆ O O O O O O O - One or two drops of oil should be
S ACE HEAD ∆ O O O O O O O O O applied after cleaning with
Y alcohol.
S PINCH ROLLER ∆ O O O O O O O O O
T POST REEL S, T ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ - Periodic time of applying oil
E SLEEVE TENSION ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ (Apply oil after cleaning)
M
POST CENTER ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ - The excessive applying oil may
LEVER IDLE BOSS (2Point) ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ be the cause of malfunction.
D CAPSTAN MOTOR PULLEY ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ O O O O O
S
R BELT PULLEY O O O O O O O
Y
I HOLDER CLUTCH ASS’Y ∆ O O O O O O O O O
S
V
T GEAR CENTER ASS’Y O O O O O O O O O
I
E
N GEAR IDLE (2Point) O O O O O O O O O
M
G
LOADING MOTOR O O O O O O O O O
B S
R
A
Y
S
BAND BRAKE ASS’Y O O O O O O O O O
T
K E
E M BRAKE T ASS’Y O O O O O O O O O

∆ : Cleaning O : Check and replacement in necessary ◆ : Add Oil

2-21
MEMO

2-22E
2-22
 RDR-VX410

3. Block Diagram

EEPROM 4MB FLASH DVD-Rewritable Drive

4MB(x2) SDRAM
RF Out(Splitter) 24LC32 K8D3216UBM TS-H552B
(32bit)
(I2C) (8bit)
VHF/UHF
RF
TM BLOCK

SIF CVBS

MTS IC
MSP3417D
DVD V IN 6CH AMP DECODER ENCODER 2MB(x4) SDRAM
L/R from Tuner LA73054 CS98202 CS92686 (64bit)

MUX VIDEO
SV1274 Y/C NIX IN
LINE1 IN(REAR) DECORDER
7 to 4 SAA7115
Video Mux SW VCR V IN

6 to 4 AUDIO ADC
Audio Mux SW CS5340
LINE2 IN(FRONT)
2CH VCR MICOM
UPD78F4928GF
VCR DECK
IEEE1394PHY
SUPER IN TSB41AB1
AV I-CHIP
DV IN LA71750
AUDIO
VIDEO DAC
L CS4391 HI-FI
LA72646
R

Y
Pb Front Panel Key Input
Pr VFD DRIVE, KEY CONTROL
PT6315
L
R Remocon

SCART-JACK

SUPER OUT

COAXIAL
IEC958
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

3-1 3-2
MEMO

3-4E
 RDR-VX410

4. PCB Diagrams

4-1 VCR Main PCB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3

4-2 DVD Main PCB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-7

4-3 Jack PCB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11

4-4 DV Jack PCB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15

4-5 Function Timer PCB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17

4-1 4-2
4-1 VCR Main PCB

COMPONENT SIDE

4-3 4-4
CONDUCTOR SIDE

4-5 4-6
4-2 DVD Main PCB

COMPONENT SIDE

4-7 4-8
CONDUCTOR SIDE

4-9 4-10
4-3 Jack PCB

COMPONENT SIDE

4-11 4-12
CONDUCTOR SIDE

4-13 4-14
4-4 DV Jack PCB

COMPONENT SIDE CONDUCTOR SIDE

4-15 4-16
4-5 Function Timer PCB

COMPONENT SIDE

CONDUCTOR SIDE

4-17 4-18
MEMO

4-20E
 RDR-VX410

5. Schematic Diagrams

◆ Block Identification of Main PCB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3 Note

5-1 S.M.P.S (VCR Main PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5 For schematic Diagram
- Resistors are in ohms, 1/8W unless otherwise noted.
5-2 Power (VCR Main PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7 Special note :
Most semiconductor devices are electrostatically sensitive and therefore require the special handling techniques described under the
5-3 Logic (VCR Main PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-9 “electrostatically sensitive (ES) devices” section of this service manual.

5-4 A/V (VCR Main PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-11 Important safety notices :

Components identified with the mark 0 have the special characteristics for safety. When replacing any of these components.
5-5 Hi-Fi (VCR Main PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-13 Use only the same type.

5-6 OSD (VCR Main PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-15

5-7 SECAM (VCR Main PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-17

5-8 Function Timer (Function Timer PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-19

5-9 Encoder (DVD Main PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-21

5-10 Decoder (DVD Main PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-23

5-11 Video Decoder and Connector (DVD Main PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-25

5-12 DV Interface and 1394 Connector (DVD Main PCB)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-27

5-13 Connectors and Power (DVD Main PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-29

5-14 MUX, NICAM, TM, PDC, SCART, Front Jack (JACK PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31

5-15 ADC/DAC, VIC1 (LA73054) BLOCK (JACK PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-33

5-16 MTS/Tuner (JACK PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-35

5-17 Component/Super Out (JACK PCB) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-37

5-1 5-2
◆ Block Identification of Main PCB

VCR MAIN PCB

<Component Side> <Conductor Side>

5-3 5-4
5-1 S.M.P.S. (VCR Main PCB)

5-5 5-6
5-2 Power (VCR Main PCB)

5-7 5-8
5-3 Logic (VCR Main PCB)

5-9 5-10
5-4 A/V (VCR Main PCB)

5-11 5-12
5-5 Hi-Fi (VCR Main PCB)

5-13 5-14
5-6 OSD (VCR Main PCB)

5-15 5-16
5-7 SECAM (VCR Main PCB)

5-17 5-18
5-8 Function Timer (Function Timer PCB)

5-19 5-20
5-9 Encoder (DVD Main PCB)

MCLK0
MCLK1
MD[31:
MD 31:0]

CHANGE P Partt Type(FB23,FB24,FB25,FB26)

Type(FB23,FB24,FB25,FB26)
3225 to 2012
P3V3 P3V3

MD10
MD11

MD12
MD13

MD14
MD15

MD16
MD17

MD18
MD19

MD20
MD21
MD22
MD23

MD24
MD25
MD26

MD27

MD28
MD29
MD30
MD31

CAS~
RAS~
WE~
MA0
MA1
MA2
MA3
MA4
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3

MD4
MD5
MD6

MD7

MD8
MD9
MD
MD

MD
MD

MD
MD

MD
MD

MD
MD

MD
MD
MD
MD

MD
MD
MD

MD

MD
MD
MD
MD

MA
MA
MA
MA
MA
MD
MD
MD
MD

MD
MD
MD

MD

MD
MD
SM1V8P3V3 FB23 FB24
0(2012) 0(2012)

[4] SM_SYSCLK R123 22R

IC102 IC103

75R
75R
C133 0.1uF

C134 0.1uF

C135 0.1uF

C136 0.1uF

C137 0.1uF
SM1V8 P1V8 PLL_1V8_VDD
FB14 FB15

R124
R125
1 VDD0 VSS1 50 1 VDD0 VSS1 50
CHAN
CHANGE
GE Part Type(FB14,FB15) 3225 to 2012 MD15 2 49 MD0 MD31 2 49 MD16
MD14 3 DQ0 DQ15 48 MD1 MD30 3 DQ0 DQ15 48 MD17
100XL/3A C138 100XL/3A C139 C140 4 DQ1 DQ14 47 4 DQ1 DQ14 47
+ + VSSQ0 VSSQ3 VSSQ0 VSSQ3
0.1uF MD13 5 46 MD2 MD29 5 46 MD18

240
239
238
237
236
235
234
233
232
231
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
199
198
197
196
195
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
330uF/6.3V 100uF/16V CS92688
CS MD12 6 DQ2 DQ13 45 MD3 MD28 6 DQ2 DQ13 45 MD19
7 DQ3 DQ12 44 7 DQ3 DQ12 44
R126 0R MD11 8 VDDQ0 VDDQ3
VDDQ 43 MD4 MD27 8 VDDQ0 VDDQ3
VDDQ 43 MD20

MCKOUT0
MCKOUT1

MCAS
MRAS
IO_VSS35

IO_VSS34

IO_VSS33

IO_VSS32

IO_VSS31

IO_VSS30

IO_VSS29

IO_VSS28

IO_VSS27

MWE
DD26
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
DD25
MD4
MD5
MD6
MD7
DD24
MD8
MD9
MD10
10
MD11
11
MD12
12
MD13
13
DD23
MD14
14
MD15
15
MD16
16
MD17
17
_VDD6
DD6
_VSS6
CORE_VSS6
MD18
18
MD19
19
DD22
MD20
20
MD21
21
MD22
22
MD23
23
MD24
24
MD25
25
MD26
26
MD27
27
DD21
MD28
28
MD29
29
MD30
30
MD31
31

DD20

MA0
MA1
MA2
MA3
MA4
DQ4 DQ11 DQ4 DQ11

MD
MD
MD
MD

MD
MD
MD
MD

MD
MD

MA
MA
MA
MA
MA
_VDD2

_VDD2

_VDD2

_VDD2

_VDD2

_VDD2

_VDD2
MD10 9 42 MD5 MD26 9 42 MD21
DQ5 DQ10 DQ5 DQ10

MD
MD
MD
MD

MD
MD
MD
MD

MD
MD

MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD
MD

MD
MD
MD
MD
10 VSSQ1 VSSQ2 41 10 VSSQ1 VSSQ2 41

CORE_V
1 MD9 11 40 MD6 MD25 11 40 MD22

IO_V

IO_V

IO_V

IO_V

IO_V

IO_V

IO_V
PLL_VDD DQ6 DQ9 DQ6 DQ9

CORE
CORE
2 180 MA5 MD8 12 39 MD7 MD24 12 39 MD23
Change
hange PLL_VDD
PLL_VDD -> PLL_1V8_V
PLL_1V8_VDD(
DD(041204)
041204) 3 PLL_VSS MA5
MA 13 DQ7 DQ8 38 13 DQ7 DQ8 38
4 GBL_PWRDN 179 MA6 14 VDDQ1 VDDQ2
VDDQ 37 14 VDDQ1 VDDQ2
VDDQ 37
5 PLL_BP MA6
MA 178 WE~ 15 LDQM N.C/RFU 36 WE~ 15 LDQM N.C/RFU 36
6 SE IO_VDD19 177 C141 0.1uF CAS~ 16 WE UDQM 35 MCLK2 CAS~ 16 WE UDQM
UDQ 35 MCLK0
ADD
ADD C246,R
246,R174
174 for EMI modify 7 DEBUG_EN IO_VSS26 176 MA7 RAS~ 17 CAS CLK 34 R127 4.7K RAS~ 17 CAS CLK 34 R128
8 SYSCLK MA7
MA 175 MA8 18 RAS CKE 33 18 RAS CKE 33 4.7K
[3] SM_HRESET~ HRSTn MA8
MA CS N.C
N. CS N.C
N.
9 174 MBA0 19 32 MA9 MBA0 19 32 MA9 R151
R15
C246
C24 R174
R1 330R CS_INn IO_VSS25 173 MA9 MA10 20 BA A9 31 MA8 MA10 20 BA A9 31 MA8 0R
20pF 10 MA9
MA 172 MA10 MA0 21 A10/AP A8 30 MA7 MA0 21 A10/AP A8 30 MA7
[5] DVCLK49MHZ PCLK MA10 A0 A7 A0 A7
[5] PLINKON 11 171 MA1 22 29 MA6 MA1 22 29 MA6
PLINKON
PLINKO MBA1 A1 A6 A1 A6

MCLK2
MC
12 170 MBA0 MA2 23 28 MA5 MA2 23 28 MA5
PD7 13 PDIRECT MBA0 MA3 24 A2 A5 27 MA4 MA3 24 A2 A5 27 MA4
P3V3 R129 PD6 14 PD7 169 25 A3 A4 26 25 A3 A4 26
PD5 15 PD6 IO_VSS24 168 MD32 VDD1 VSS0 VDD1 VSS0
PD4 16 PD5 MD32 167 MD33
1K C142 0.1uF 17 PD4 MD33 166
18 IO_VSS0 IO_VDD18 165 MD34
PD3 IO_VDD0 MD34 MD35 416S1120 416S1120
19 PD3 MD35 164
163 C143 0.1uF C144 0.1uF C145 0.1uF
PD2 20 IO_VSS23 162 MD36 C146 0.1uF C147 0.1uF
PD1 21 PD2 MD36 161 MD37 C148 0.1uF C149 0.1uF
PD0 22 PD1 MD37 160 C150 0.1uF C151 0.1uF
23 PD0 CORE_VDD5 C153 0.1uF C154 0.1uF
24 IO_VSS1 159 C155 0.1uF C156 0.1uF
[5] PD[7:0] IO_VDD1 CORE_VSS5
25 158 MD38
[5] PCNT1
26 PCNT1 MD38 157 MD39
[5] PCNT0
27 PCNT0 MD39 156
[5] PLPS
28 PLPS IO_VDD17 155
PLREQ
IC101A IO_VSS22
[5] PLREQ C157 0.1uF MD40
29 CORE_VSS0 MD40 154
153 MD41
MD41 152 MD42
30 MD42 151 MD43 MA[10:0]
MA 0:0]
C158 0.1uF 31 CORE_VDD0 MD43 150 C159 0.1uF
IO_VSS2 IO_VSS21
[3,4]
[3,4]
PCMI_LRCK
PCMI_DATA
32
33
34
IO_VDD2
LRCK_IO
LRCK_I
SDA_IO
SDA_I
CS92686-CMZ
MQFP-240
MD44 149
MD45 148
MD44
MD45 P3V3
Change
hange P3V3 to SDRA
SDRAM
M VDD
VDD fo
forr CKE Pull-up Registor(041204)
Registor(041204)
P3V3
[3,6] ADC_BCK 35 BCK_IN_DEC IO_VDD16 147
36 MD46
37 BCK_IN_ENC MD46 146 MD47
38 IO_VSS3 MD47 145 FB25 FB26
39 ND_TREE IO_VSS20 144 MD48
MD48 143
0(3216) 0(2012)
GPIO0 MD49
40 MD49 142
P3V3 41 GPIO1 CORE_VDD4 141 C160 0.1uF
42 IO_VSS4 CORE_VSS4 140 IC104 IC105
43 GPIO2 MD50
44 IO_VDD3 MD50 139 MD51
GPIO3 MD51 138
10K
10K

10K
10K

C161 0.1uF 45
46 IO_VSS5 IO_VDD15 137 C162 0.1uF MD32
1 VDD0 VSS1 50
MD47 MD48
1 VDD0 VSS1 50
MD63
47 GPIO4 IO_VSS19 136 MD52 MD33
2 DQ0 DQ15 49
MD46 MD49
2 DQ0 DQ15 49
MD62
48 GPIO5 MD52 135 MD53
3 DQ1 DQ14 48 3 DQ1 DQ14 48
49 IO_VSS6 MD53 134 MD54 MD34
4 VSSQ0 VSSQ3 47
MD45 MD50
4 VSSQ0 VSSQ3 47
MD61
GPIO6 MD54 133 5 DQ2 DQ13 46 5 DQ2 DQ13 46
R132
R133

R134
R135

MD55 MD35 MD44 MD51 MD60

50 MD55 132 6 DQ3 DQ12 45 6 DQ3 DQ12 45
51 IO_VDD4 IO_VSS18 131 MD56 MD36
7 VDDQ0 VDDQ3
VDDQ 44
MD43 MD52
7 VDDQ0 VDDQ3
VDDQ 44
MD59
JTAG Port HEADER
HEADER 5X2 RJ116 0R 52 GPIO7 MD56 130 MD37
8
9 DQ4 DQ11 43
42 MD42 MD53
8
9 DQ4 DQ11 43
42 MD58
RJ117 0R 53 TDO 129 MD57 10 DQ5 DQ10 41 10 DQ5 DQ10 41
2 1 TD
TDI 54 TCK MD57 128 MD38 11 VSSQ1 VSSQ2 40 MD41 MD54 11 VSSQ1 VSSQ2 40 MD57
4 3 TDO 55 CORE_VSS1 IO_VDD14 127 MD58 MD39 12 DQ6 DQ9 39 MD40 MD55 12 DQ6 DQ9 39 MD56
6 5 TCK RJ118 OR 56 CORE_VDD1 MD58 126 MD59 13 DQ7 DQ8 38 13 DQ7 DQ8 38
8 7 TMS RJ120 OR 57 TDI MD59 125 C163 0.1uF 14 VDDQ1 VDDQ2
VDDQ 37 14 VDDQ1 VDDQ2
VDDQ 37
10 9 58 TMS
TM IO_VSS17 124 MD60 WE~ 15 LDQM N.C/RFU 36 WE~ 15 LDQM N.C/RFU 36
59 IO_VDD5 MD60 123 MD61 CAS~ 16 WE UDQM 35 MCLK1 CAS~ 16 WE UDQM
UDQ 35 MCLK3
_VDD2
DD2

_VDD3
DD3
IO_VDD6 MD61 CAS CLK CAS CLK

DTACK_RDY
RDY
_VSS2
CORE_VSS2

_VSS3
CORE_VSS3
K27_MOD
K27_DEM
MBIST_MSZ

MD62 RAS~ R136 RAS~ R137 4.7K

SBHE
122 17 34 17 34
TST_MODE

CLK27_MO

MD62 RAS CKE RAS CKE

MBIST_MS

_WRNRN
CLK27_DE

RWN_SBH
A_REQ

INT_MOTn
IO_VDD10

IO_VDD11

IO_VDD12

IO_VDD13
CN101
CN C164 0.1uF 60 121 MD63 18 33 4.7K 18 33
IO_VSS10

IO_VSS11

IO_VSS12

IO_VSS13

IO_VSS14

IO_VSS15

IO_VSS16
SYS_RDY
RDY
LDS_RDN
S_RDN
INTn
HUI_INTn
IO_VSS7 MD63 CS N.C
N. CS N.C
N.
IO_VDD1

IO_VDD1

IO_VDD1

IO_VDD1
DD7
_VDD7

DD8
_VDD8

DD9
_VDD9
IO_VSS8

IO_VSS9

DMA_RE
CORE_V

CORE_V
DTACK_ MBA0 19 32 MA9 MBA0 19 32 MA9
AS_ALE

UDS_W
BA A9 BA A9

INTX16
HAD10
HAD11

HAD12
HAD13
HAD14
HAD15

HSELn MA10 20 31 MA8 MA10 20 31 MA8

RWN_
CORE
CORE

CORE
CORE
HAD0
HAD1
HAD2
HAD3
HAD4
HAD5
HAD6
HAD7

HAD8
HAD9
HAD1
HAD1

HAD1
HAD1
HAD1
HAD1

SYS_
A10/AP A8 A10/AP A8
IO_V

IO_V

IO_V

HUI_
MA0 MA7 MA0 MA7

UDS
21 30 R15
R150 21 30
YD0
YD1
YD2
YD3
YD4

YD5
YD6
YD7

A0 A7 A0 A7
DM
HR
YD
YD
YD
YD
YD

YD
YD
YD

LD
CL
CL

[4] MA1 22 29 MA6 0R MA1 22 29 MA6

VD_TRST A1 A6 A1 A6
[4] MA2 23 28 MA5 MA2 23 28 MA5
VD_TMS A2 A5 A2 A5
[4] MA3 24 27 MA4 MA3 24 27 MA4
VD_TCK A3 A4 A3 A4
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
[4] VD_TDO 25 VDD1 VSS0 26 25 VDD1 VSS0 26

MCLK3
[4] VD_TDI
0.1uF

0.1uF

0.1uF

4.7K
4.7K
4.7K

0.1uF
4.7K_NC
22R

C166 0.1uF
10K

47K

416S1120 416S1120
C170 0.1uF C171 0.1uF
C165

R141
R142

C167

C168

C169
C172 0.1uF C173 0.1uF
R140

R144

R145
R146
R147

C174 0.1uF C175 0.1uF

C176 0.1uF C177 0.1uF
C179 0.1uF C180 0.1uF
C181 0.1uF C182 0.1uF
SM_HIUINT~
_R DY

HM_WR~
HM_RD~
HM_CS3
HM_D10
HM_D11

HM_D12
HM_D13
HM_D14

HM_D15

HM_ALE
HM_D0
HM_D1
HM_D2
HM_D3
HM_D4
HM_D5
HM_D6
HM_D7

HM_D8
HM_D9

HM_R
Y IN0
Y IN1
Y IN2
Y IN3
Y IN4

Y IN5
Y IN6
Y IN7

MA[10:0]
MA 0:0]
[3,4] YIN[7:0]
MD[63:
MD 63:32
32]
[3,4] VIN_CLK
[4] SM_SYSCLK
[3] HM_D[15:0]
[3] HM_ALE
[3] HM_RDY
[3] HM_CS3
[3] HM_RD~
[3] HM_WR~
[3] SM_HIUINT~
1
TP8

ADD
DD C
C247,
247,C2
C248,R
48,R175,R
175,R176
176
for EMI modify

5-21 5-22
5-10 Decoder (DVD Main PCB)

[6] V_R_
V_R_OU
OUT V_R_OU
V_R_ OUT
ADC_BC
DC_BCK [2,6]
Y_G_O
Y_G _OUT
UT
[6] Y_
Y_G_
G_OU
OUT PCMI
PC MI_LR
_LRCK
CK [2,4]
[2
U_B_
U_ B_OU
OUT
[6] U_
U_B_
B_OU
OUT PCMI
PC MI_DAT
_DATAA [2,
[ 2,4]
4]

75R0/1%
0/1%

75R0/1%
0/1%

82R0/1%
0/1%

82R0/1%
0/1%

75R0/1%
0/1%

75R0/1%
0/1%
75R

75R

82R

82R

75R

75R
IO_RXD
IO_R XD [6]
IO_T
_TXD
XD [6]
8V @ 3A
1.8V 3 IO_CLK
_CLK [6]
P3V3
P3V REGULATOR(LP3966)

R57

R58

R59

R60

R61

R62
R56
R5 P1V8
P1V P3V3
IC206 op
open
en R173
R1 73 1K
HM _RDY
HM_R DY [2]
HM_W
HM _WR~
R~ [2
[2]
R63 2 VIN VOUT 4 HM_RD~
HM RD~ [2] VID_
VI D_P3V
P3V3 P3V3
[6
[6] PC MO_LRCK
PCMO _LRCK HM_CS3
HM _CS3 [2]
0R
[6
[6] PCMO
PC MO_BC
_BCK
GND

1 5 FB9
TAB

HM_CS1
HM_CS1
HM_CS0
_CS0
SD SENSE [6]
[6 PCMI
PC MIO_
O_XC
XCLK
LK

HM _R DY
R~
_WR~
RD~
HM_RD~
HM_CS3
_CS3
0(2012)
0(2012) Change Part Type(FB9,FB10,FB12)
[4]
[4 CS982_CLK SM _HIU
SM_H IUIN
INT~
T~ [2
[2]

HM_W
33pF
3pF
47R BEAD
open

HM_R
C61 C59 PCMO_D
PC MO_D0
[6
[6] PCMO
PC MO_D
_D0 DV_AV_SEL
DV_AV_ SEL [4] 3225 to 2012

HM_

HM
245
C245
C58 + DAC-3V
DAC- 3V3_VDD
3_VDD

HM
HM
3
6

[6]
[6 SPDIF_O
SPD _OUTUT
C60 + LP3965ES-1.8 DVD_A_MU
DVD_A_ MUTE
TE [6]
(IEC958)
R55

R39
0.1uF 4.7uF/25 P3V3 ADD C99,C245,R38,R39 V CC
C

R3
4.7uF/25 FB10
FB10
100nF for EMI Modify
105¡C 105¡C

180R
1 80R

5 .1K
0(2012)
0(2 012)

5.1
22R

22R

22R
22R
22R

22R
22R

2 K2 NC
0 R NC
R64 47R BEAD

2K2
2K2
2K2
2K2
2K2
2K2
10K
+ C231
231 + C2 30
C230

N
C6 2 + Install Resister when 47uF/
47u F/16V
16V 47uF/
47u F/16V
16V

2K2
0R
0 .1uF
uF

0 .1uF
uF

0 .1uF
uF

0 .1uF
uF

0 .1uF
uF

0 .1uF
uF
0 .1uF
uF

0 .1uF
uF

0 .1uF
uF

0 .1uF
uF

0 .1uF
uF

0 .1uF
uF
IO_ RDY
USE SINGLE POINT CONNECTION TO QUIET GND.

IO_RXD
_RXD
new DMA function
nction Works.

CLK
TXD
10K
5 0.1

6 0.1

7 0.1

8 0.1

C6 9 0.1

0 0.1
1 0.1

2 0.1

3 0.1

4 0.1

IO_CL

5 0.1

6 0.1
IO_TX
DO NOT USE ANY VIAS FOR CONNECTIONS. 100uF/16V
100uF 16V
P1V8 (R73) DAC_1V8_VDD
DAC_1V 8_VDD P1V8

IO_
IO_
PROVIDE 1 SQ. IN THERMAL PAD WITH NO

R65

R66

R68
R69
R70

R71
R72

R74
C65

C66

C67

C68

C69
R677
C70
C71

R522

C72

C73

C74

C75

R733

C76

R7 5
R75
R766
R777
R788
C6

C6

C6

C6

R6
C7
C7

R5

C7

C7

C7

C7

R7

C7

R7
R7
R7
R79
SOLDER MASK. FB12
FB12
0(2012)
0(2 012) IO _RXD
IO_R XD
IO_T
IO _TXD
XD
For use a regulator as the spec + IO_CLK
_CLK R181 1K

240
239
238
237
236
235
234
233
232
231
230
229
228
227
226
225
224
223
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
199
198
197
196
195
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
IO_R
_R DY
CORE_VD
CO RE_VDD
FB13
FB 13
9966 --> R63:0, R56:open, R55:open, C60:100nF
G9966 C2 32
C232

PCMI_DATA
XTALOSC_OUT
GPD11
GPD10

SPDIF_O

XTALOSC_IN

SPI_DI

HM_WR
HM_RD
V/R_OUT

Y/G_OUT

U/B_OUT
IO_VSS12

PCMIO_XCLK

PCMO_LRCK

DAC_ANA_VSS7

DAC_ANA_VSS6

DAC_ANA_VSS5

DAC_ANA_VSS4

DAC_SUB_VSS1

PCMI_LRCK

SPI_DO
SPI_CLK
PCMO_D0

PCMO_BCK

VREF_YUV
ISET_YUV
COMP_YUV

PCMI_BCK

SPI_RDY

IO_VSS11
IO_VDD11
PCMO_D3
PCMO_D2
PCMO_D1
CORE_VSS5
CORE_VDD5

HM_CS3
HM_CS2
IO_VDD10
HM_CS1
HM_CS0
PLL_VSS2

DAC_RAIL_VSS1
GPD9
GPD8

DAC_RAIL_VDD1

DAC_WELL_VDD1

GPD7
GPD6
GPD5
GPD4
PLL_VSS1
DAC_ANA_VDD7

DAC_ANA_VDD6

DAC_ANA_VDD5

DAC_ANA_VDD4

HM_RDY
DAC_GUARD_VSS1
DAC_GUARD_VDD1
NC 47uF/
47u F/16V
16V
LP3966 --> R63:10k, R56:4.7k, R55:10k, C60:open N
Add C231 for Noise Reduction
S6 100XL/3A + C8
C80 CGMS-D OPTION
CG N B
BY S CH KIM 20041207
R800

NC
R8

100uF/16V
100uF 16V
CGMS
CG MS_D_CLK
_D_CLK [5]
[5
1 PLL_VDD0 PLL_VDD2 180
P3V3 [6] SYS_RESET~
SYS_RESET SYS_RESET~
SYS_RESET 2 179 1 R277
277 0R
RSTB GPD3 TP
TP4
10nF

R81
R8 1 1
1.5K 3 178 1
10n

TEST GPD2 TP5

TP
1 IR_I
_IN 4 177 R82 22R
TP6 IR_IN HM_ALE HM_ALE
HM ALE [2]
Change Part Type(FB13,FB20,FB22,FB21) IDE_IR
ID E_IRQ 5 176 CGMS_D_DA
CGMS _D_DATA1
TA1 [5]
GPMS18 HM_A3
C100
100

FB20
FB20 3225 to 2012 R83 10K 6 175 CGMS
CG MS_D_DA
_D_DATA0
TA0 [5]
0(3216)
0(3 216) ADD C100 for ESD Modify 7 GPMS19 GPD1 174
GPMS20 GPD0 ANALOG_
ANAL OG_RST~
ST~ [4,5,6]
[4,5
8 173 HM_A2
9 GPMS21 HM_A2 172 HM_A1
P3V3 DQM3
DQ M3 10 IO_VDD0 HM_A1 171 C81
C8 1 0 .1uF
0.1uF
C8 2
C82 0.1uF
0 .1uF MD3
MD31 11 DQM3 CORE_VSS4 170 HM_A0
C83
C8 3 0 .1uF
0.1uF MD30
MD3 12 MD31 HM_A0 169
C84
C8 4 0 .1uF
0.1uF MD29
MD2 13 MD30 CORE_VDD4 168
C85
C8 5 0 .1uF
0.1uF C86
C8 6 0 .1uF
0.1uF C87
C8 7 0.1uF
0 .1uF 14 RA24/MD29 GPD16 167
MD2
MD28 15 IO_VSS0 DAC_RAIL_VDD0 166
IC202 IC203 MD27
MD2 16 RA23/MD28 DAC_GUARD_VDD0 165 C88
C8 8 0 .1uF
0.1uF
MD26
MD2 17 RA22/MD27 DAC_GUARD_VSS0 164
1 54 MD21 1 48 MD22 MD25
MD2 18 RA21/MD26 DAC_ANA_VDD3 163 R5 1
R51 5.1K
5
MD31 2 VDD1 VSS1 53 MD23 MD20 2 A15 A16 47 19 RA20/MD25 DAC_ANA_VSS3 162 C89
C8 9 0 .1uF
0.1uF
3 DQ0
DQ DQ15 52 MD19 3 A14 BYTE 46 MD2
MD24 20 IO_VDD1 VREF_YC 161 R85 180R
180
MD30 4 VDDQ1 VSSQ1 51 MD22 MD18 4 A13 VSS1 45 MA0 MD23
MD2 21 RA19/MD24 ISET_YC 160 C90
C9 0 0.1uF
0 .1uF CVBS_OUT
CVBS_O UT
DQ1
DQ DQ14 A12 A-1/DQ15 RA18/MD23
IC201 COMP_YC
MD29 MD21 MD17 ROMD7
ROM D7 Y_
_OU
OUT CVBS_O
VBS_OUT
UT [6]
5 DQ2
DQ DQ13 50 5 A11 DQ7 44 22 CORE_VDD0 DAC_ANA_VSS2 159 C91
C9 1 0 .1uF
0.1uF
Y_OU
Y_ OUT
T [6]
[6]
6 49 MD16 6 43 MD22
MD2 23 158 C_OU
C_ OUT
VSSQ2 VDDQ2
VDDQ A10 DQ14 RA17/MD22 DAC_ANA_VDD2 C_OU
C_ OUT
T [6]
[6]

75R 0/1%
75R0/1%
75R0/1%
0/1%

75R 0/1%
75R0/1%
75R0/1%
0/1%

75R 0/1%
75R0/1%
75R0/1%
0/1%
MD28 7 48 MD20 MA10 7 42 ROMD6
ROM D6 C9 5
C95 0.1uF
0 .1uF 24 157
MD27 8 DQ3
DQ DQ12 47 MD19 MA9 8 A9 DQ6 41 C96
C9 6 0.1uF
0 .1uF 25 CORE_VSS0 YC_OUT 156
DQ4
DQ DQ11 A8 DQ13 IO_VSS1 DAC_ANA_VSS1

75R

75R

75R
9 46 MD25 9 40 ROMD5
ROM D5 MD2
MD21 26 155
MD26 10 VDDQ3 VSSQ3 45 MD18 MD26 10 A19 DQ5 39 MD20
MD2 27 RA16/MD21 DAC_ANA_VDD1 154
MD25 11 DQ5
DQ DQ10 44 MD17 MWE 11 A20 DQ12 38 ROMD4
ROM D4 MD19
MD1 28 RA15/MD20 Y_OUT 153 C97
C9 7 0 .1uF
0.1uF
DQ6
DQ DQ9
DQ WE DQ4 RA14/MD19 DAC_ANA_VSS0

R86
R87

R88
R89

R90
R91
12 43 SYS_RESET~
SYS_RESET 12 37 MD18
MD1 29 152 Do not Install Resister when

DQM3
DQM3
MD24

T_MWE
13
14
15
16
VSSQ4
DQ7
DQ
VDD2
LDQM
VDDQ4
VDDQ
DQ8
DQ
VSS2
NC
42
41
40
39
MD16

DQM2
DQ M2
MD27

MD24
13
14
15
16
RST
A21
VDD
DQ11
WP/ACC DQ3
RY/BY DQ10
36
35
34
33
ROMD3
ROM D3

ROMD2
ROM D2
MD17
MD1

MD1
MD16
DQM2
DQ M2
30
31
32
33
RA13/MD18
RA12/MD17
IO_VDD2
RA11/MD16
CS98202 DAC_ANA_VDD0
C_OUT
DAC_SUB_VSS0
DAC_WELL_VDD0
151
150
149
148
C104
104 0.

C105
0.1u

105 0.
1uF

0.1u
1uF
R92
R9 2 2.2
2 .2K
new DMA ffunction Works.
(R93)

MCASL
MCAS 17 WE UDQM 38 T_MCKO1 MD23 17 A18 DQ2 32 C106
C1 06 0.
0.1u
1uF 34 DQM2 DAC_RAIL_VSS0 147
CAS CLK A17 DQ9 IO_VSS2 GPD20 SM_H
SM _HRESET~
RESET~ [2]
[2
MRASL
MRAS 18 37 MCKEH
MC KEH MA8 18 31 ROMD1
ROM D1 DQM1
DQM1 35 146 ATAPI
AT API_0_RST~
0_RST~
19 RAS CKE 36 MA7 19 A7 DQ1 30 MD15
MD1 36 DQM1 GPD19 145
BS0
BS1
MAP
MA0
20
21
22
CS
BA0
BA1
AP/A10
NC
A11
A9
A8
35
34
33
MA10
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
20
21
22
A6
A5
A4
A3
DQ8
DQ0
OE
VSS0
29
28
27
ROMD0
ROMD0
MAP
MD14
MD1
MD13
MD1
MD12
MD1
MD11
MD1
37
38
39
MD15
MD14
MD13
MD12
240LQFP GPD18
GPD17
HM_D15
HM_D14
144
143
142
R9 3
R93
HM_D15
HM _D15
HM_D14
HM _D14
HM_D13
HM _D13
0R
0
HM_D[15:
HM _D[15:0]
0] SM _HIU
SM_H IUINT~
HM_D[15:
HM
T~ [2]
_D[15:0]
0] [2]
C2 00
C200
1uF
1u

23 A0 A7 32 23 A2 CE 26 40 MD11 HM_D13 141

MA1 24 31 MA6 MA2 24 25 MA1 41 140 HM_D12
HM _D12 Install Resister when
MA2 25 A1 A6 30 MA5 A1 A0 MD10
MD1 42 IO_VDD3 HM_D12 139 HM_D11
HM _D11
A2 A5 MD10 HM_D11 new DMA function
nction Works.
MA3 26 29 MA4 C1 07 0.1u
C107 0.1uF 43 138 HM_D10
HM _D10
27 A3 A4 28 29DL323
29DL32 C108
C1 08 0.
0.1u
1uF 44 IO_VSS3 HM_D10 137 HM_D
HM _D9 (R95,R96)
VDD3 VSS3 MD9 45 CORE_VSS1 HM_D9 136 HM_D
HM _D8 FPC CONN 1.0mmX40PIN
mX40PIN
R192
192 R94 10K 46 MD9
MD HM_D8 135 HM_D
HM _D7
4S641632 0R FL_CS~
FL _CS~ MD8 47 CORE_VDD1 HM_D7 134 HM_D
HM _D6
MD8
MD HM_D6 CN202
R1 52
R152

C109
109 0.1uF
0.1u MD7 48 133 HM_D
HM _D5
MD7
MD HM_D5
0R

C110
110 0.1u
0. 1uF NV_CE~
NV _CE~ MD6 49 132 C111
111 0.
0.1u
1uF ATAPI_0_RST~
ATAPI 0_RST~ 1 2
MD6
MD IO_VSS10

0R NC
NC
C112
112 0.1u
0. 1uF MD5 50 131 VIN_CL
VI N_CLK
K [2,4]
[ 2,4] HM_D
HM _D7 3 4 HM_D8
HM_D

N
N
MD4 MD5
MD VIN_CLK HM_D
HM _D6 HM_D
HM _D9
CKO

51 MD4
MD IO_VDD9 130 5 6
T_MCK

0R
C113
C1 13 0.
0.1u
1uF 52 129 HM_D
HM _D5 7 8 HM_D10
HM _D10
1
2
3

0
0
IO_VSS4 HM_CS5
T_M

P3V3
P3V MD3 53 128 HM_D
HM _D4 9 10 HM_D11
HM _D11
JP1 54 MD3
MD HM_CS4 127 HM_D4
HM_D HM_D
HM _D3 11 12 HM_D12
HM _D12
IO_VDD4 HM_D4

R9 5
R95
R966
P3V3 NC MD2 55 126 HM_D
HM _D3 HM_D
HM _D2 13 14 HM_D13
HM _D13

R9
MD1 56 MD2
MD HM_D3 125 HM_D
HM _D2 DM ARQ_
DMAR Q_H HM_D
HM _D1 15 16 HM_D14
HM _D14
Add R202,C227 for EMI Modify FB21
FB21 Y I N0 57 MD1
MD HM_D2 124 HM_D
HM _D1 DMACK_L
DM ACK_L HM_D
HM _D0 17 18 HM_D15
HM _D15
0(3216)
0(3 216) Y I N1 58 VIN_D0 HM_D1 123 HM_D
HM _D0 19 20
FB22
FB22 Y I N2 59 VIN_D1 HM_D0 122 C114
114 0.
0.1u
1uF 21 22
0(3216)
0(3 216) Y I N3 60 VIN_D2 IO_VSS9 121 C115
115 0.
0.1u
1uF HM_W
HM _WR~
R~ 23 24
CORE_VDD2

CORE_VDD3
VIN_D3 CORE_VSS2 PLL_VSS0

CORE_VSS3
C117
117 ADD
DD R
R31,C101 HM_RD~
HM_RD 25 26

SDAT_MST
SCLK_MST
MAP/NVOE

SDAT_SLV
SCLK_SLV

PLL_VDD1
C116
C1 16 0.
0.1u
1uF HM_R
HM _R DY 27 28
for EMI Modify
IO_VDD5

IO_VDD6

IO_VDD7

IO_VDD8
IO_VSS5

IO_VSS6

IO_VSS7

IO_VSS8

GPMS10
C118
118 0.1uF
0.1u 29 30
+

ROMD0
ROMD1
ROMD2
ROMD3
ROMD4
ROMD5

ROMD6
ROMD7

GPMS8
GPMS9
VIN_D4
VIN_D5
VIN_D6
VIN_D7
NV_CE

GPD12
GPD13
GPD14
GPD15
MCKO

M_WE

C119
119 0.1u
0. 1uF 47uF/
47u F/16V
16V ID E_IRQ
IDE_IR 31 32
MCKE
DQM0

RXD1
MA10

TXD1
MD0

C120
120 0.1u
0. 1uF HM_A1 33 34
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5

MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
CN201
RAS
CAS
BS1
BS0

C121
121 0.1u
0. 1uF 1 2 MA0 HM_A0 35 36 HM_A2
MA1 3 GND0 A0 4 MA2 HM_CS0
HM _CS0 37 38 HM_CS1
HM _CS1
IC204 MA3 5 A1 A2 6 39 40
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
YIN4 102
YIN5 103
YIN6 104
105
YIN7 106
LK 107
DAT 108
_ICLK 109
DAT 110
111
RXD 112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
A3 GND1

5 .6K
5 .6K

5 .6K
10K
MA4 7 8 MA5

5.6
5.6

5.6
1 54 9 A4 A5 10 MA6
VDD1 VSS1 GND2 A6

V_ICLK
MD15 2 53 MD7 MA7 11 12 MA8 V CC
C

SLV_IDA

_IDA
MS_ICL
DQ0
DQ DQ15 A7 A8
0R
0R

3 52 MA9 13 14

UART_RX
MS_I
SLV_I
VDDQ1 VSSQ1 A9 GND3

SLV_
MD14 4 51 MD6 MA10 15 16 MD16

MS
MS
DV_AV_SEL~
DV_AV_SEL~ [4]
[4

UART_
DQ1
DQ DQ14 A10 A11

SL

R9 7
R97
R988

R999
0.1uF

0.1uF

0.1uF
0.1uF

0.1uF
0.1uF

R1 00
R100
MD13 5 50 MD5 MD17 17 18 MD18 IO _R RQ
IO_R

R9

R9
122 0.1u

123 0.1u

124 0.1u
125 0.1u

126 0.1u
127 0.1u
DQ2
DQ DQ13 A12 A13 IO_RRQ
RRQ [6
[6]
6 49 19 20 MD19 IO_SRQ
IO _SRQ IO_SRQ
IO _SRQ [6] R101
101 10K
MD12 7 VSSQ2 VDDQ2
VDDQ 48 MD4 MD20 21 GND4 A14 22 MD21 V CC
C
DQ3
DQ DQ12 A15 A16
C122

104
R104
105
R105
C123

C124
C125

C126
C127
MD11 8 47 MD3 MD22 23 24 R102
102 5.6K
5. 6K
9 DQ4
DQ DQ11 46 MD23 25 A17 GND5 26 MD24 R107
R1 07 10K
MD10 10 VDDQ3 VSSQ3 45 MD2 MD25 27 A18 A19 28
MD9 11 DQ5
DQ DQ10 44 MD1 29 A20 A3V3 30
12 DQ6
DQ DQ9
DQ 43 31 B3V3 GND6 32
MD8 13 VSSQ4 VDDQ4
VDDQ 42 MD0 33 GND7 C3V3 34 ROMD0
ROMD0 VCC
14 DQ7
DQ DQ8
DQ 41 RO MD1
ROMD 35 D3V3 D0 36 ROMD2
ROM D2
DQM1
DQM1 VDD2 VSS2 ROMD
RO MD3 D1 D2 ROMD4
ROM D4 CN203
NV_CE~
_CE~

15 40 37 38
MD0
MD1
MD2
MD3
MD4
MD5

MD6

MD7
MCKEH

MRASL
ASL
MCASL
ASL

LDQM NC D3 D4
ROMD
ROMD
ROMD
ROMD
ROMD
ROMD

ROMD

ROMD
MCKE

T_MWE DQM0
DQ M0 ROMD5
ROM D5
DQM0
DQM0

16 39 39 40
MA10
10

WE UDQM GND8 D5 4
MAP
MD0

MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6

MA5

MA4

MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
BS1
BS0

MCASL
MCAS 17 38 T_MCKO RO MD6
ROMD 41 42 R1 08
R108
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO
RO

RO

RO
MD

MR
MC
MA

MA
MA
MA
MA
MA

MA

MA

MA
MA
MA
MA
NV

MRASL
MRAS 18 CAS CLK 37 MCKEH
MC KEH ROMD
RO MD7 43 D6 GND9 44 R109
109 10K 10K
3
19 RAS CKE 36 R110
R1 10 10K 45 D7 D8 46 R111
111 10K 2
CS NC D9 D10 1
BEAD

BS0 20 35 MA10 47 48 R112

112 10K
03 47R BEA

BS1 21 BA0 A11 34 MA9 R1 13

R113 10K 49 GND10 D11 50 R114
114 10K HDR1 SHRD NC
HDR1X4
MAP 22 BA1 A9 33 MA8 R115
R1 15 10K 51 D12 D13 52
AP/A10 A8 D14 GND11 MS_IDA
MS_IDATT [4,
[ 4,6]
6]
0R

MA0 23 32 MA7 R116

R1 16 10K 53 54 MWE
A0 A7 D15 WE MS_I
MS _ICL
CLKK [4,
[ 4,6]
6]
0R

MA1 24 31 MA6 55 56 MAP Add R201,C226 for EMI Modify

A1 A6 GND12 OE P3V3
R103

100R

100R
00R
100R
MA2 25 30 MA5 MD26 57 58 NV_CE~
NV _CE~

00R
100R
100

100
A2 A5 A21 CE
R1

MA3 26 29 MA4 SYS_RESET

SYS_RESET~ 59 60
A3 A4 RST GND13
1.5K
1.5K
1.5K
5K
5.6K
6K
5.6K
6K

27 28 C128
128 0.1u
0. 1uF
VDD3 VSS3
1.
5.
5.

CN204
CN2 04
R1 06
R106
R177
77

IC205
1 2
R1

4S641632

209
R209

208
R208

121
R121

R122
22
C129
129 0.1uF
0.1u 3 4 1 8

R1
5 6 A0 VDD
117
R117
118
R118
119
R119
120
R120

C130
130 0.1u
0. 1uF 2 7
C131
131 0.1u
0. 1uF 7 8 3 A1 WE 6
C132
132 0.1u
0. 1uF 9 10 4 A2 SCL 5
HEAD
EADER
ER 5x2-2M
5x2-2MM VSS SDA
CKO

I2C
I2 C DEBU
EBUGG PO
PORT
RT
T_MWE
T_MCK

YIN[
YI N[7:
7:0]
0] [2,4]
[2 VCCP3V3
VC 524AB0X91
MWE
T_M

NC

5-23 5-24
5-11 Video Decoder and Connector (DVD Main PCB)

P3V3 VDD_7115
DD_7115
FB2

100XL/3A
100 XL/3A +

C1014
1014
00nF
100nF

C1015
1015
00nF
100nF

C1016
1016
00nF
100nF

C1017
1017
00nF
100nF

C1018
1018
00nF
100nF

C1019
1019
00nF
100nF

C1020
1020
00nF
100nF

C1021
1021
00nF
100nF

C1022
1022
00nF
100nF

C1023
1023
00nF
100nF
C1013
1013
4.7uF/50V
4.7uF 50V

VDDA_7115
DDA_7115
FB5

100XL/3A
100 XL/3A +

1025
C1025
00nF
100nF

1026
C1026
00nF
100nF

1027
C1027
00nF
100nF

1028
C1028
00nF
100nF
C1024
1024
4.7uF 25V
4.7uF/25V
105¡C
105

23
17
11

25
51
75

33
43
58
68
83
93
8

1
GND_
ND_A

VXDD
ADDA0
ADDA1
ADDA2

ADDE0
ADDE1
ADDE2
ADDE3

VDDI0
VDDI1
VDDI2
VDDI3
VDDI4
VDDI5
ADDA
ADDA
ADDA

ADDE
ADDE
ADDE
ADDE
R1035
1035 75R

LLC 28
LLC2 29
34 R1033
1033 0R
TP107 1 22 RTS0 35 R1032
1032 0R TP126
TP126

RT
[6] LINE2_V
LI NE2_VIN AOUT RTS1 TP127
TP127
RTCO 36
TP104 1 R1101
1101 180R C1001
1001 47nF
47n VIP_A_Y_CVBS
VIP_A_Y_ VBS 20 VDD_7115
VDD _7115
AI11 80
XTRI 96
R1102
1102 180R C1002
1002 47nF
47n VIP_FRON
VIP_FRONT_
T_Y 18 XRDY 95 R1031
1031 10K
[6] Y_IN
Y_I AI12 XDQ
XCLK 94
92
C1007
1007 100nF
100 nF 19 IC1001 XRH 91

ANALOG INTERFACE
AI1D XRV

X PORT
TP105 1 R1103
1103 NC/180R_1%
NC/ _1% C1003
1003 open
en VIP_A_C_
VIP_A_C_CVBS
VBS 16 90
AI21 SAA7115 XPD0
XPD1 89
XPD2 87
R1104
1104 180R C1004
1004 47nF
47n VIP_FRONT_
VIP_FRONT_C 14 86
[6] C_IN
C_ AI22 XPD3
XPD4 85
XPD5 84
R1105
1105 180R C1005
1005 47nF
47n VIP_FRONT_CVBS
VIP_FRONT_ VBS 12 82
[6] CVBS_I
VBS_IN AI23 XPD6
XPD7 81
TP106 1 R1106
1106 180R C1006
1006 47nF
47n VIP_TUN_
VIP_TUN_CVBS
VBS 10 AI24 72
HPD0
560R
60R

560R
60R

560R
60R

560R
60R

560R
60R
open
HPD1 71
[6] LINE1_V
LI NE1_VIN C1008
1008 100nF
100 nF 13 70
P3V3 AI2D HPD2 69

H PORT
HPD3 67
HPD4 66
HPD5 65
HPD6
R1001
1001

R1002
1002

R1003
1003

R1004
1004

R1005
1005

R1006
1006

10K
10K

10K
10K

10K
TP108 1 44 64
TP109 1 73 TEST0 HPD7
TP110 1 74 TEST1 VDD_7115
VDD _7115

TEST
EST
TP111 1 77 TEST2 47
TP112 1 78 TEST3 ITRI 42 R1030
1030 10K
TEST4 ITRDY
1036
R1036
1037
R1037

1038
R1038
1039
R1039

1040
R1040
TP113 1 79 46 PNX ITU IN VAL R1029
1029 0R 1 TP124
TEST5 IDQ 45 PNX IT
ITU IN C
CLK
LK R1034
1034 22R
ICLK VIN_CL
VI N_CLK
K [2,3]
[ 2,3]
48 PNX ITU IN FFID R1028
1028 0R 1 TP123
R1007
1007 NC /0R 97 IGP0 49 VIP IG
IGP1
P1 R1027
1027 0R 1

Add R1035,C1012 for EMI Modify

[2] VD_TRST
VD_TRS TRSTN IGP1 TP122
[2] VD_T
VD _TCK
CK R1008
1008 NC /0R 98 53 PNX HS IN R1026
1026 0R 1 TP121
R1009
1009 NC /0R 99 TCK IGPH 52 PNX VS IN R1025
1025 0R 1

JTAG
TAG
[2] VD_TMS
VD_TM TMS
TM IGPV TP120
[2] VD_TDI
VD_T DI R1010
1010 NC /0R 3
R1011
1011 NC /0R 2 TDI

I PORT
[2] VD_T
VD _TDO
DO TDO 62 PNX ITU IN0 R1024
1024 0R YIN0
YIN0
IPD0 61 PNX ITU IN1 R1023
1023 0R YIN1
YIN1
R1012
1012 100R 31 IPD1 60 PNX ITU IN2 R1022
1022 0R YIN2
YIN2
[3,6] MS_ICL
MS_ICLK SCL IPD2 59 PNX ITU IN3 R1021
1021 0R YIN3
YIN3
IPD3

I2C
R1013
1013 100R 32 57 PNX ITU IN4 R1020
1020 0R YIN4
YIN4

I2
[3,6] MS_I
MS _IDA
DAT SDA IPD4 56 PNX ITU IN5 R1019
1019 0R YIN5
YIN5
IPD5 55 PNX ITU IN6 R1018
1018 0R YIN6
YIN6
TP114 1 30 IPD6 54 PNX ITU IN7 R1017
1017 0R YIN7
YIN7
R1014
1014 0R 27 RESON IPD7
[3,5,6
,6] ANALOG_
ANAL OG_RST~
ST~ CE
TP115 1 4 XTOUT

CLOCK
OCK
AMCLK 37
R1015
1015 10R 6 39

CL
C2222
2222 XTAL ASCLK 40

AMC
ALRCLK

AM
100nF
nF X1001 24.576MH
24.576MHz 7 41
XTALI AMXCLK
YIN[
YI N[7:0]
7:0] [2,3]

VSSA0
VSSA1
VSSA2

VSSE0
VSSE1
VSSE2
VSSE3

VSS10
VSS11
VSS12
C1009
1009 C1010
1010

AGND

VXSS
18pF
18p 18pF

24
15
9
21

26
50
76
100

38
63
88
TP116 1 R1016
1016 NC
TUB2

C1011
1011
NC 0R(32
0R 3216)
16)

GND_
ND_A

R46
R4 6 100R
1 00R
SM_SYSCLK
SM _SYSCLK [2]

Change
hange Part Type(FB19)
Type(FB19)
3225 to 2012 P3V3
P3V3
FB19
FB1 IC303
303
[3] DV_AV_SEL~
DV_AV _SEL~ 1 14 C42
C4 2 100n
1 00nF
C239
C2 39 0.
0.1u
1uF
F 2 G1 VCC 13
C240
C2 40 27
27pF
pF R32
R3 2 0R
0 R30 100R 3 A1 G4 12
[2,3] VI
VIN_CL
N_CLK Y1 A4
IC302 100XL/3A
100XL/3A 4 11
G2 Y4 ADC_ SDA
ADC_SD A [6]
[6]
X3 5 10 R139
R1 39 22R
A2 G3 PCMI
PC MI_DAT
_DATAA [2,3]
[ 2,3]
27MH
27MHz R184
184 R183
183 1 14 P3V3 6 9
Y2 A3 ADC_LRCK [6]
10ppm
10ppm 0R 1M 7 8 R1 31
R131 22R
GND Y3 PCMI
PC MI_LRCK
RCK [2,3]
C241
C2 41 27p
27pF 2 13 R41
R4 1 0R_
0 R_NC
NC
DV_AV_SE
DV_AV_ SELL [3]
[3]
4 .7K

74VHC
74V HC125
125
4.7

0R
R185
185 220R 3 12

0
R187
187 1M 4 11
R500

C243
243 15pF
R5

R400
R188
188 100R
00R 5 10

R4
C244
244 15pF
6 9
7 8

CS982_CLK
CS 982_CLK R48
R4 74HCU04
74HCU0
[3] CS982_CLK
00R
100R

5-25 5-26
5-12 DV Interface and 1394 Connector (DVD Main PCB)

P3V3 3V3PLL_PHY
3V3PLL_P HY
L1301

100XL/3A

1nF
1301
C1301
100nF

1318
C1318
3V3A_PH
3V 3A_PHY
L1302

CGMS-D OPTION BY D H PARK 20050202

100XL/3A

1nF

1nF

1nF
1302
C1302
100nF

1303
C1303
100nF

1316
C1316
100nF

1319
C1319

1320
C1320

1321
C1321
[3] CGMS_D_DAT
CGMS _D_DATA0
A0 R1301
1301 0R 3V3D_PHY
3V3D_P HY
[3] CGMS
CG MS_D_DAT
_D_DATA1
A1 R1302
1302 0R
L1303
[3] CGMS
CG MS_D_CLK
_CLK R1303
1303 22R
22

R301,C319 for EMI

EM 100XL/3A

1nF

1nF
1304
C1304
100nF

1305
C1305
100nF

1322
C1322

1323
C1323
R1343
1343 +

10K

10K
open
330R
Add R301,C319

C1314
1314
100uF/16V
00uF/16V

25
26
61
62

30
31
42
51
52

56
1304
R1304

1305
R1305

1306
R1306
odify
Modify

AVDD1
AVDD2
AVDD3
AVDD4
AVDD5
DVDD1
DVDD2
DVDD3
DVDD4

PLVDD
R1342
1342 1k
24 CPS NC
NC1 16
[2] DVCLK49MHZ
DVCLK49M HZ 2 SYSCLK NC2
NC 43
TP11
TP117 1 3 44
R1307 47R
47 R BEAD CNA NC3
NC 45
[3,4,6] ANALOG_
ANALOG_RST~
RST~ R1309
1309 0R 53 NC4
NC 46
23 RESETN NC5
NC 47
R1308
1308 0R 1 ISON NC6
NC 54 C1313
1313 NC
[2] PLREQ
PLR EQ LREQ NC7
NC
NC8
NC 55
C1317
1317
PD0 R1311
1311 0R 6 100nF C1312
1312 NC
C1307
1307 PD1
PD2
R1312
1312 0R
R1313
1313 0R
7 D0
D1
IC1301
Add C228 for ESD Modify OPEN
PEN 8 D2
PD3 R1314
1314 0R 9 34 TPB-
PD4 R1315
1315 0R 10 D3 TPBO- TPB- [6]
PD5
PD6
R1316
1316
R1317
1317
0R
0R
11 D4
D5
TSB41AB1_64P TPAO- 36 TPA-
TPA- [6]
[2] PD[7:0] 12 D6
PD7 R1318
1318 0R 13 37 TPA+
D7 TPAO+ A+ [6]
TPA+
TP
35 TPB+
PCNT0 R1319
1319 0R 4 TPBO+ B+ [6]
TPB+
TP
[2] PCNT
PCNT0 CTL0
[2] PCNT1
PCNT PCNT1 R1320
1320 0R 5 38
CTL1 TPBISO

56R

56R

56R

56R
56

56

56

56
[2] PLINKON
PLI NKON R1321
1321 0R 19 Change Value 6.34K_1% to 6.2K//150R
C_LKON
(R1329,R1330)
[2] PLPS R1322
1322 0R 15 LPS

1333
R1333

1334
R1334

1335
220 pF R1335

1336
R1336
60 R1331
1331 0R
X0
[6] 1394PD 14 X1301
PD 59 1 2
X1
4.7K
7K

13K
open

1341 0R
NC
10k

NC

4.

20 24.576M
24.576MHZ
HZ +
10

PC0
R1341

21 C1310
1310
PC1

5.1K
1K
1311
C1311
22 1uF/16V
1uF/ 16V
PC2
1325
R1325

1326
R1326

1338
R1338

1332
R1332
5.
C1308
1308 C1309
1309
TP118
TP
1323
R1323

1324
R1324

1337
R1337

R2 40 R1330
1330 0R 22pF
2pF 22pF
2pF
1K 27
28 TESTM

PLLGND1
PLLGND2
R1327
1327 29 TEST1 41 R1329
1329 6.2K
2K
DGND1
DGND2
DGND3
DGND4

AGND1
AGND2
AGND3
AGND4
AGND5
AGND6
TEST0 R1 Change Value 56R2_1% to 56R
R1340
1340 10K
(R1333 ~ R1336)
TP119 Change Value 270pF to 220pF
1K

3V3D_PHY
3V3D_PH 1 R1339
1339 NC
(C1311)
17
18
63
64

32
33
39
48
49
50

57
58
R1328
1328

C1315
1315
For use Philips Chip : R1341 open NC

C1317 open
R1304 10k
R1326 10k

5-27 5-28
5-13 Connectors and Power (DVD Main PCB)

V3.3

P3V3

C306 C307
+ 100uF/16V
0.1uF

TP205
TP206
TP207
TP208
TP209

TP220
TP221
TP222
TP223
TP224
TP225
CN1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
2 1 V5CC_25 VCC
VC
[3] PCMO_D0
PCMO_D
[3] PCMO_BCK
PCMO_BC 4 3 ADC_SD
ADC_SDA [4]
[3] PCMO_LRCK 6 5 ADC_BCK
ADC_BC [2,3]
[3] PCMIO_XCLK 8 7 ADC_LRCK [4]
[3] SPDIF_OUT
IF_OUT 10 9 [3] L3
DVD_A_MUTE
DVD_A_MUT
(IEC958) 12 11
TP210
TP211
TP212

14 13 0R(3216)
16 15 MS_ICLK [3,4]
18 17 MS_IDAT [3,4] C308 + C309
20 19 0.1uF 100uF/16V
22 21 ANALOG_RST~ [3,4,5]
1
1
1

[5] IO_T
IO_TXD 24 23 SYS_RESET~
SYS_RESET [3]
[3] IO_RRQ
IO_ RRQ 26 25 IO_CLK
_CLK [3]
[3] IO_SR
_SRQ 28 27 IO_RX
_RXD [3]
30 29
L6

1
1
1
1
0R(3216)
HEADER 15X2

TP226
TP227
TP228
TP213
GND_
GND_A
TP214
TP215
TP216
TP217
TP218
TP219

TP229
TP230
TP231
TP232
TP233
TP234
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
CN2 CN3

2 1 CVBS_IN [4] 2 1
[3] V_R_OUT 4 3 [5] TPB-
PB- 4 3 TPA+ [5]
6 5 C_IN [5] 6 5
[3] U_B_OUT 8 7 [5] TPB+
PB+ 8 7 TPA- [5]
10 9 Y_IN [5] 10 9
[3] Y_G_OUT
Y_G_OU 12 11 12 11
14 13 L4
[3] C_OUT
C_OU 16 15 0R(3216)
18 17 LINE2_VIN [5] HEADER
ADER 6X
6X2
[3] Y_OUT
Y_OU 20 19
22 21 LINE1_VIN [5]
[3] CVBS_OUT 24 23
26 25 1 TP235
TP23 GND_
GND_A GND_A
GND_
TP239
TP23 1 28 27
30 29 1 TP236
TP23

HEADER 15X2 1394PD [5]

GND_A
GND_

5-29 5-30
5-14 MUX, NICAM, TM, PDC, SCART, Front Jack (JACK PCB)

5-31 5-32
5-15 ADC/DAC, VIC1 (LA73054) BLOCK (JACK PCB)

5-33 5-34
5-16 MTS/Tuner (JACK PCB)

5-35 5-36
5-17 Component/Super Out (JACK PCB)

5-37 5-38
MEMO

5-40E
 RDR-VX410

6. ALIGNMENT AND ADJUSTMENTS

6-1 VCR ADJUSTMENT

6-1-1 Reference

1) X-Point (Tracking center) adjustment, “Head switching adjustment” can be adjusted with remote control.
2) When replacing the Main PCB Micom (IC601) and NVRAM (IC603: EEPROM) be sure to adjust the “Head switching adjustment”.
3) When replacing the cylinder ass’y, be sure to adjust the “X-Point” and “Head switching adjustment”.
4) How to adjust.
- Intermittently short-circuit the Test Point on Function Timer PCB with pincers to the adjustment mode.
- If the corresponding adjustment button is pressed, the adjustment is performed automatically.
- When the adjustment is completed, be sure to turn the power off.

6-1-1(a) Location of adjustment button of remote control

OPE
CLOS TV DVD

VIDEO

DVD VIDEO
PROG
1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9
CLEAR SET
0
INPUT TV/
SELECT VIDEO

ORIGINAL/ TIME/
PLAYLIST DISPLAY TEXT SUR

SYSTEM TITLE
MENU
TIMER
LIST

TOP MENU MENU

X-Point (Tracking Center) Adjustment ;
ENTER

RETURN TOOLS

Head Switching Adjustment ;

RMT-D224P

Fig. 6-1

6-1
6-1-1(b) TEST location for adjustment mode setting

Short-Circuit for few seconds and release.

(Just one time)

Fig. 6-2 Function Timer PCB (Top View)

6-2
6-1-2 Head Switching Point Adjustment
1) Playback the alignment tape.
2) Intermittently short-circuit the two Test Points on Function Timer PCB while setting the adjustment mode. (See Fig. 6-2)
3) Press the “1, 0” buttons ; remote control adjustment operates automatically. (See Fig. 6-1)

6-3
6-2 VCR MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
6-2-1 Tape Transport System and Adjustment Locations
The tape transport system has been adjusted precisely in the factory. Alignment is not necessary except for the
following :
1) Noise observed on the screen.
2) Tape damage.
3) Parts replacement in the tape transport system.

Lower flange height of tape guide is used as the reference for the transport adjustment.
To maintain the height of the tape guide and prevent damage, do not apply excessive force onto the main base.

CYLINDER ASS'Y

GUIDE ROLLER "S"

GUIDE ROLLER "T"

FULL ERASE HEAD HEIGHT SCREW

#3 GUIDE POST
PINCH ROLLER
TENSION POST
TILT SCREW
X - POSITION #9 GUIDE POST
ADJUST SILT
AZIMUTH SCREW
CAPSTAN
#8 GUIDE POST

SUPPLY REEL DISK TAKE UP REEL DISK

Fig. 6-3 Location of Tape Transport Adjustment

FE HEAD CYLINDER ASS'Y PINCH ROLLER

GUIDE ROLLER "S" GUIDE ROLLER "T"
POST TENSION #8 GUIDE POST #9 GUIDE POST

#3 GUIDE POST ACE HEAD MAIN BASE

CAPSTAN SHAFT

Fig. 6-4 Tape Travel Diagram

6-4
6-2-2 Tape Transport System Adjustment
When parts are replaced, perform the required adjustments by referring to procedures for the tape transport
system. If there are any changes to the tape path, first run a T-120 tape and make sure excessive tape wrinkle does not occur at the tape guides.

◆ If tape wrinkle is observed at the guide roller S, T, turn the guide roller S, T until wrinkle disappears.
◆ If the tape wrinkle is still observed at the tape guide, perform the tilt adjustment of the ACE head.

(1) ACE Head Assembly Adjustment

a. ACE HEAD HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

1) Run the alignment tape (Color bar) in the playback mode.

2) Observe surface of the audio head using a dental mirror.
3) Turn screw (C) clockwise or counterclockwise until the gap of lower tape edge and the lower edge of the control head is about 0.25mm.
(Refer to Fig. 6-5 and 6-6)

SCREW (A) SCREW (C)

TLIT ADJUST HEIGHT ADJUST

X-POSITION
ADJUSTING SLIT

SCREW (B) SCREW (D)

AZIMUTH ADJUST X-POSITION LOCKING

Fig. 6-5 Location of ACE Head Adjustment Screw

AUDIO HEAD

VIDEO HEAD

0 ~ 0 .25 mm

CONTROL HEAD

Fig. 6-6 ACE Head Height Adjustment

6-5
b. ACE HEAD TILT ADJUSTMENT

1) Playback a blank tape and observe the position of the tape at the lower flange of tape guide.
2) Confirm that there is no curl or wrinkle at the lower flange of tape guide as shown in Fig. 6-7 (B).
3) If a curl or wrinkle of the tape occurs, slightly turn the screw (A) tilt adjust on the ACE head ass’y.
4) Reconfirm the ACE head height.

(A) (B)

WRINKLE

(BAD) (GOOD)

Fig. 6-7 Tape Guide Check

c. AUDIO AZIMUTH ADJUSTMENT

1) Load alignment tape (Mono scope) and playback the 7KHz signal.
2) Connect channel-1 scope probe to audio output.
3) Adjust screw (B) to achieve maximum audio level. (See Fig. 6-5)

6-6
d. ACE HEAD POSITION (X-POINT) ADJUSTMENT

1) Playback the alignment tape (Color bar)

2) Intermittently short-circuit the two Test Points on Function Timer PCB. (See Fig. 6-2)
3) Press the “0, 5” remote control buttons, then adjustment is operates automatically. (See Fig. 6-1)
4) Connect the CH-1 probe to “Envelope” the CH-2 probe to “H’D switching pulse” and then trigger to CH-1.
5) Insert the (-) driver into the X-Point adjustment hole and adjust it so that envelope waveform is maximum.

Test point: TP2 (Audio Output)

TP3 (Envelope)
TP4 (H’D S/W -Trigger)
TP5 (Control Pulse)

iew) PULSE
CONTROL

HEAD SWITCHING

ENVELOPE

AUDIO OUTPUT

Fig. 6-8 Location of Test point (VCR Main PCB-Top View)

6-7
(2) Linearity adjustment (Guide roller S, T adjustment)

1) Playback the Mono Scope alignment tape (SP mode).

2) Observe the video envelope signal on an oscilloscope (triggered by the video switching pulse).
3) Make sure the video envelope waveform (at its minimum) meets the specification shown in Fig. 6-9.
If it does not, adjust as follows :
Note:
a=Maximum output of the video RF envelope.
b=Minimum output of the video RF envelope at the entrance side.
c=Minimum output of the video RF envelope at the center point.
d=Maximum output of the video RF envelope at the exit side.

4) If the section A in Fig. 6-10 does not meet the specification, adjust the guide roller S up or down.
5) If the section B in Fig. 6-10 does not meet the specification, adjust the guide roller T up or down.

a c
b d

abcd
c,b,d/a 63%

Fig. 6-9 Envelope Waveform Adjustment

H'D SWITCHING PULSE

A B

ENVELOPE A B

Fig. 6-10 Adjustment Points

6-8
6) Play back the Mono Scope alignment tape (SP mode).
7) Connect an oscilloscope CH-1 to the “Envelope” and CH-2 to the “H’D SW Pulse” for triggering.
8) Turn the guide roller heads with a flat head ( ) driver to obtain a flat video RF envelope as shown in Fig. 6-11.

IDEAL ENVELOPE

S HEIGHT TOO HIGH S HEIGHT TOO LOW T HEIGHT TOO HIGH T HEIGHT TOO LOW

GUIDE ROLLER S GUIDE ROLLER T

Fig. 6-11 Guide Roller S, T Height Adjustment

(3) Check Transitional Operation from RPS to Play

Check transition from RPS mode to play mode : Using a pre-recorded SP tape, make sure the entry side of envelope comes to an appropriate
steady state within 3 seconds (as shown in Fig. 6-12).
If the envelope waveform does not reach specified peak-to peak amplitude within 3 seconds, adjust as follows :

1) Make sure there is no gap between the supply roller lower flange and the tape.
If there is a gap, adjust the supply guide roller again.
2) Change operation mode from the RPS to the play mode (again) and make sure the entry side of envelope rises within 3 second.
ENTRANCE SIDE ENVELOPE

Fig. 6-12 Video Envelope Rising when Operation mode Changes from RPS to Play Mode

6-9
(4) Envelope Check

1) Make recordings on T-120 (E-120) and T-160 (E-180) tape.

Make sure the playback output envelope meets the specification as shown in Fig. 6-13.
2) Play back a self recorded tape (recording made on the unit using with T-120 (E-120).
The video envelope should meet the specification as shown in Fig. 6-13.
In SP mode, (A) should equal (B).
If the head gap is wide, upper cylinder should be checked.

A B

Fig. 6-13 Envelope Input and Output Level

(5) Tape Wrinkle Check

1) Run the T-160 (E-180) tape in the playback, FPS, RPS and Pause modes and observe tape wrinkle at each guide.
2) If excessive tape wrinkle is observed, perform the following adjustments in Playback mode :

◆ Tape wrinkle at the guide roller S, T section : Linearity adjustment.

◆ Tape wrinkle at tape guide flange : ACE head assembly coarse adjustment.

6-2-3 Reel Torque

1) The rotation of the capstan motor causes the holder clutch ass’y to rotate through the belt pulley.
2) The spring wrap PLAY/REV of holder clutch ass’y drives the disk reel S, T through gear idler by rotation of gear center ass’y.
3) Brake is operated by slider cam at FF/REW mode.
4) Transportation of accurate driving force is done by gears. (Gear Center Ass’y)

Note: If the spec. does not meet the followings specifications, replace the holder clutch ass’y and then recheck.

< Table 6-1 >

MODE TORQUE g/cm GAUGE

PB 42 ± 11 Cassette Torquemeter

RPS 145 ± 30 Cassette Torquemeter

6-10E
 7. TROUBLESHOOTING
No Power Detected Key Operation or
(stand by LED OFF) Remote Control Error

NO Is the measurement of NO
F1S01 is normal? Change fuse power with in normal value? Check power and front connector

YES
YES

NO
BD01~04, ZD1S01~2 Change short circuited or XT601 14.318MHz NO
SHORT and OPEN opened parts Check the circuity around the clock
oscillation is normal?
are normal?

YES
YES

NO NO
Is there voltage at Check 2'st Voltage Check the circuity Check the circuity around
Collector of around IC601 reset? IC601 reset
Q1S01
7-1

YES YES

Operation of NO NO
Replace Q1S01 Check the soldering Check the soldering around the
Q1S01 is
normal? around IC601 good? IC601

YES YES

Check feedback IC1S01 Check the circuity around the swith.

Key operatious such NO check the condition of commmunication
as STOP,PLAY,OPEN with Main Micom
are normal? (IC601 42~45, VFD STB, CLOCK
DATA-IN,DATA-OUT)
YES

End repairs STOP,PLAY,OPEN NO

Key operatious are Change IC701

RDR-VX410
normal?

YES

End
 PLAY MODE (VCR Section) MECHANISM DOESN'T
INOPERATIVE (VCR Section)
OPERATE IN PLAY MODE

NO SEE TURN VCR POWER ON

EE-VIDEO (VIDEO MISSING IN EE MODE)

YES LOAD A TAPE AND

PRESS PLAY BUTTON
INSERT THE CASETTE
TAPE RECORDED BY
ANOTHER VCR AND
PRESS PLAY BUTTON

NO (LOAD) NO CHECK
TAPE LOADING IC601-38 START (S601)
OPERATION IC601-39 IC601
PLAY NO NO
INDICATOR PRESS PLAY KEY CHECK
IN THE DISPLAY IN REMOTE IC601, XT601
CONTROL YES YES

YES YES
CHECK CN604
7-2

8pin 12V
CHECK PLAY Button
and Pattern

NO
CYLINDER CHECK CYLINDER
MECHANISM NO SEE ROTATION
(MECHANISM DOES NOT
OPERATION OPERATE IN PLAY MODE)

YES
YES DOES NOT OPERATE
OR OPERATES
BUT STOP SOON

NO SEE SW 25Hz NO CYL FG.PG

PB-VIDEO VIDEO MISSING
IN PLAY MODE IC601-24 IC601-97

YES YES

SEE (PB VIDEO) AUDIO MISSING A

IN PLAY MODE
 A RECORD MODE
(VCR Section)
DOESN'T OPERATE

CAPSTAN NO SEE
(CAPSTAN DOES NOT
ROTATION ROTATE) PLAY NO SEE
(PLAY MODE
OPERATION DOESN'T OPERATE)
YES
YES

DC TAKE UP REEL SENSOR LOAD VCR WITH A

(S.T REEL) SUPPLY REEL SENSOR BLANK TAPE AND
IC601-98,99 (PT601.PT602) PRESS RECORD BUTTON

PULSE

EJECT NO
REC MODE SAFETY TAB CHANGE TAPE
STOP MODE CHECK
PROG.SW STATE LOADING MOTOR
IC601-76,77,78 MECHANISM OR SW601
YES YES

YES
7-3

CHANGE SW602

CHANGE IC601

NO
D-REC A (H)
IC601-68 CHECK IC601

YES

NO SEE
REC-VIDEO (VIDEO MISSING IN
RECORD MODE)

YES

SEE
(AUDIO MISSING IN
RECORD MODE)
 FAST FORWARD FWD SEARCH DOESN'T
(VCR Section) (VCR Section)
DOESN'T OPERATE OPERATE

LOAD TAPE AND

PRESS F.FWD BUTTON
PLAY NO SEE
OPERATION (PLAY DOESN'T OPERATE)

YES
F.FWD NO PRESS FF NO
INDICATOR IN KEY IN REMOTE CHANGE IC601, XT601
THE DISPLAY CONTROL
PRESS F.FWD FOR
YES YES FORWARD SEARCH

CHECK TIMER

IS CAPSTAN NO SEARCH NO
SPEED CHANGED? CHANGE DECK CHANGE IC601
OPERATION
CHECK CN604 NO
2pin 24V? CHECK POWER BLOCK
4pin 5V?
5.9pin 3.2V? YES YES
7-4

YES
END

NO
CHECK CN604 CHECK IC601
5.9pin 3.2V
NOISE BAR NO NO ADJUST
(CONTROL PULSE)
YES LOCKING IC601-86 A/CE HEAD

YES YES

NO
IC601 93pin CHECK CAPSTAN MOTOR
FG pulse
CHECK IC601 CHECK CAPSTAN
MOTOR
YES

CHECK
MECHANISM
 CASSETTE LOADING
MECHANISM (VCR Section) VIDEO MISSING IN
(VCR Section)
DOES NOT OPERATE EE MODE

TURN THE VCR PLACE VCR IN STOP MODE

POWER ON AND
INSERT A TAPE

LINE 2 INPUT

NO CST IN MODE NO CHECK

TAPE DETECTED IC601-75:HIGH(5V) START SENSOR (S601)
IC601 NO IC301-68,69 NO CHECK
IC301-65
VIDEO OUT VIDEO DATA/ IC601
YES YES CLOCK
YES YES

CHANGE IC301
NO CHECK
PRESS EJECT BUTTON CN604 8pin 12V? DM B+ LINE

NO IC601-50 NO CHECK
YES IC6P01-21 R638, C623,
VIDEO IN SYNC IN C622

YES YES
7-5

IC601-38:HIGH(5V) YES
CHANGE IC601
IC601-39:LOW(0V) CHECK OSD PICTURE

NO Q801-E NO
CHECK IC801, Q801
VIDEO OUT

YES CHECK YES

IC601-38:LOW(0V) CASSETT LOADING
IC601-39:HIGH(5V) MECHANISM
CHECK LINE OUT and
NO C830, R804, AB03, R816

CHANGE IC601
 VIDEO MISSING IN VIDEO MISSING IN
(VCR Section) (VCR Section)
RECORD MODE PLAY MODE

IC301-50pin NO E-E mode and IC801 22pin

VIDEO signal in? CHECK VIDEO signal out NO SEE PAGE 7-5
VIDEO EE MODE
(VIDEO MISSING IN EE MODE)
OPERATION

YES YES

IC301-65pin NO
CHECK IC301-55 Vcc 5V?
VIDEO signal out? PLACE THE VCR PLAY MODE

YES

IC301-79pin NO CHECK IC301-72pin Power NO NO CHECK

REC FM signal in? 5Vp-p VIDEO FM H'D SW
IC301-21 IC301-70 IC601-24

YES YES YES

7-6

CHECK
VIDEO HEAD
IC301-94pin (SP) NO
IC301-88pin (SLP) CHECK drum wafen and
CHECK REC FM signal? VIDEO head
VIDEO NO CHECK C352
IC301-46 IC301-72pin Vcc 5V

YES
YES
NO DEFECT RECORD MODE

YES YES CHECK VIDEO

VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO
IC301-65 IC601-19, 21 IC801-8 OUT LINE

NO NO NO

CHANGE IC301 CHECK IC6P01 CHECK IC801

 COLOR MISSING IN COLOR MISSING IN
RECORD MODE (VCR Section) NOTE: XT301 - Always (4.433619MHz) PLAY MODE
(VCR Section) NOTE: XT301 - Always (4.433619MHz)

(VIDEO IN) NO SEE PAGE 7-6 FM-ENV NO SEE PAGE 7-6

(VIDEO MISSING IN RECORD (VIDEO MISSING IN PLAY MODE)
RECORD MODE MODE) IC301-21

YES YES

NO NO NO YES
COLOR signal CHECK XT301 CHANGE XT301 COLOR-MONITOR COLOR-KILLER
IC301-25 IC301-25 IC301-"6"(2V)

YES NO YES NO

CHANGE IC301
NO
SW 25Hz CHECK IC601
IC301-70
NO
COLOR KILLER CHECK THE REC LINE CHECK
7-7

IC301 "33"(2V) IC301-65 YES

YES
CHECK IC301-28, 29
XT301

CHANGE YES
IC301

CHANGE
IC301
 OSD PICTURE
MISSING (VCR Section)

CHECK IC6P01-2pin 2 FSC NO

CHECK IC301-37pin
8.86MHz signal in

YES

YES
CHECK IC6P01-6,7pin CHECK C6P04, C6P05, L6P05
AFC signal out

NO

CHANGE IC6P01
7-8
 AUDIO MISSING IN AUDIO MISSING IN
(VCR Section) (VCR Section)
EE MODE
(VCR Section) REC MODE

VCR STOP MODE

CHECK
AUDIO MISSING
IN EE MODE

L1/L2 IC801-44, 46, NO CHECK

INPUT CHOICE 56, 58pin Audio C815.C814
MODE signal input C820,C821
MONO
TUNER YES MISSING AUDIO MONO

NO IC4N01 2pin
CHECK TM401 SIF INPUT HIFI

YES
IC501-7, 69 NO CHECK
AUDIO SIGNAL R510, R509, R517, R518
NO INPUT
CHECK CHECK CLK, DATA
IC601 IC4N01 12,13pin YES

YES

IC501-38,39 NO CHECK
CLK, DATA
7-9

NO NO CHANGE R570, R571

IC4N01 30, 31pin XT4N01 18.43MHz
AUDIO SIGNAL XT4N01

YES
YES YES

Change
CHECK NO IC4N01 IC501-78, 80 NO CHANGE
R4N05, R4N06 IC801-48, 60 pin
AUDIO SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNAL IC501
C4N05, C4N06

YES
YES

CHECK IC801

IC501-26 NO CHECK
AUDIO FM C513, R513

YES

CHECK CYLINDER
 MONO AUDIO MISSING
(VCR Section)
IN PB MODE

CHECK AUDIO MISSING NO CHECK

IN PB MODE PB MODE
CHECK "AUDIO
YES MISSING IN EE MODE"

IC301-13 NO IC501-4 YES CHECK

AUDIO SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNAL R3A50, R3A28, C3A24
INPUT PLACE THE VCR IN PB MODE

YES NO
CHANGE IC501

IC301-11 NO CHECK IC301-18 Vcc 5V AND MONO

AUDIO SIGNAL CHANGE IC301 AUDIO SELECT
OUTPUT
YES
HIFI

IC301-100 AUDIO NO CHANGE

FM SIGNAL IC301 IC501-31 NO CHECK
IC501-40(A.H D SW)
AUDIO FM(MIXED) CHANGE CYLINDER OR
YES IC501 23 ENVE DETECT
7-10

YES
IC301-2
MIX SIGNAL NO CHECK NO IC301 68, 69
(AUDIO+70KHz) R3A05, C3A21A CHECK (CLOCK, DATA) CHANGE
IC501
YES

Q3A02 NO CHECK
OSCILLATION Q3A03, FL3A01
IC301-5 NO CHECK ACE HEAD
C3A16, C3A49
YES AUDIO SIGNAL INPUT AND CHANGE IC301

CHECK
A/CE HEAD YES

CHECK IC301-11pin (AUDIO SIGNAL OUT)

CHANG IC301
 CAPSTAN DOES
NO SERVO LOCK (VCR Section) (VCR Section)
NOT ROTATE

PLAY
NO CHECK
CN604-2
24V B+ IN THE POWER BLOCK

YES
NO CHECK
IC601-93
C-FG CN604-1
NO CHECK
CN604-3 5V AT PC5V LINE
YES PC5V IN THE POWER BLOCK

YES

IC601-88 NO
CTL PULSE
PLACE THE VCR
IN PLAY MODE
YES
7-11

CHECK
CTL PULSE AC NO CHECK CN604-9 NO IC601-10 NO
CHANGE
LEVEL (SP. SLP: A/CE HEAD 3.2V OUTPUT(PWM)
OVER 1Vp-p) IC601

YES YES YES

CHECK R609
CHANGE
IC601

NO IC601-3 NO CHECK
CN604-5
OUTPUT(PWM) IC601
2.6V

YES YES

CHECK CHECK
CAPSTAN MOTOR R660
 DRUM DOES
(VCR Section)
NOT ROTATE

NO CHECK
CN604-8 12V AT PC12V LINE
12V IN THE POWER BLOCK

YES

NO
CN604-3 CHECK 5V LINE
5V

YES

CN604-12 NO NO
CHECK IC601-9, D CTL CHANGE IC601
2.5V
7-12

YES

CHECK CHECK
CYLINDER MOTOR R608, R617, C659A
 Disc loading error

Are main and deck No

Check the power
power OK?

Yes

Is the No
FFC cable (between main & deck) Reinsert FFC cable correctly
inserted correctly?

Yes

Change the DVD main board

7-13
 No Analog Audio Output No digital audio out

Voltage of L802 is 9V No Checking

Power block Replace Jack board Check the digital audio Refer to user manual
(jack PCB) setting

Yes Skip setting check (hardware problem)

Check the pin #13, #20 No No

IC501(Jack PCB) is LOW Check IC501 #3pin Sdata Proper vcc of DOL3 (jack PCB) Check Vcc Line

Yes Yes

Is trere a Output on C837, No Is trere a signel on No No Proper signal on 10 pin of CN03 No

Replace DVD main board Proper signal input on DOL4 Replace DVD main PCB
C836(Jack PCB)? C191, C196? of Jack PCB

Yes
Yes
Yes
Check the passive components
ardund jack pin
7-14

Check the board to board connector

between jack PCB and DVD main PCB

No
Proper signal on DOL1 Replace DOL1

Yes

Check optical and coaxial output terminal

and passive components aroud them
 No audio on line input mode or CVBS output error
recorded disc playback
Yes

Check select signal of No 24 pin in CN04

check pin63, 64 (Clock, data)of IC801 No
pin44, 46, 56, 58 in IC801 of Jack PCB has Check DVD main PCB
(jack board) normal level?

Yes Yes

Check pin56 of IC801,pin17 No Analog signals are

Check the VCR Main board of SMPS block No Check the connection between
of CN1 in jack board inputed normally CN04 and VIC1
VIC1

Yes Yes

Check all the vcc of No Power is No

Replace Jack PCB Check the connection between
IC501, IC502 normal at VIC1-1,24, 34?
VIC1-1 and power
(jack PCB)

Yes
Yes

Check passive components

around jack-pin and IC801
Check the connection with
7-15

Pin5,12 in VIC1 is No
VCR Micom.
in LOW state? check VIC1 peripheral circuit

Yes

Doos
the video signals is 2V level at No Check the connection between
output jack? VIC1 and output jack

Yes

Check the RCA cable

 S-Video output error Component output error

4, 8 and 12pin in CN04 of No

jack PCB or CN2 of DVD main Check DVD main PCB
16pin and 20pin in CN04 of PCB has normal level?
No
jack PCB or CN2 of DVD Main PCB Check DVD main PCB.
has normal level?
Yes

Yes
Analog signals are No Check the connection between4, 8 and
inputted normally 12pin in CN04 of Jack PCB and VIC1
VIC1
Analong signals are No Check the connection between 16, 20 pin
inputted nirmally in CN04 of Jack PCB and VIC1 Yes
VIC1 (Jack PCB)

Yes
Power is normal No Check the connection between
at VIC1-1,24, 34? VIC1-1 and power

No Check the connection between

Power is normal at VIC1-1,24, 34? Yes
VIC1-1 and power

Yes
Video signals of No
Check the connection between
7-16

about 2V appears at
VIC1 and output jack
output jack?
Check VIC1-21, 23, 25, VR32,
Pin13 in VIC1 is No Check the connection betweenVIC1-13 VR33, VR34
in high state? and VCR Micom. check VIC1 peripheral circuit Yes

Check the connection of component cable

Yes

Video signals of No
about 2V appears at Check the connection between
output jack? VIC1 and output jack.
Check VIC1-28, 31, VR30, VR31
Yes

Check the connection of S-Video cable

 Line1 CVBS Video Input Error

Pin4 in IC801 No Check the connection between

has nomal level?
(jack PCB) pin4 in IC801 and L1 Scart-Jack

Yes

Pin21 in IC801 No
has nomal level? Check pin 62, 55 in IC801 of input power

Yes

No Check the connection between pin12

Pin12 in IC1001 DVD main PCB
has nomal level? in IC1001 of DVD main PCB

Yes

Pin45 and pin 54~62 in

No
7-17

IC1001 of DVD main PCB has clock and Check IC1001 peripheral circuit
digital video signal
nomal level?

Yes

Check feed back

 Line2 CVBS Video Input Error Line2 S-Video Video Input Error

Pin 6 in IC801 No Check the connection between Pin 5, 9 in CN04 No Check the connection between pin 16
has nomal level? pin 6 in IC801 and L2 pin-jack has nomal level and 9 in CN04 and L2 S- videojack
(jack PCB) (jack PCB)

Yes
Yes

Pin 21 in IC801 No Pin14 and 18 in IC1001 of No

Check pin 62, 55 in IC801 of input power Check the connection between pin14 and
has nomal level? DVD main PCB has 18 in IC1001 of DVD main PCB
nomal level?

Yes
Yes

No Pin 45 and pin54~62

Pin12 in IC1001 of DVD main Check the connection between pin80 No
in IC1001 of DVD main PCB has clock Check IC1001 peripheral circuit
PCB has nomal level? in IC1001 of DVD main PCB and digital video signal
nomal level?
Yes
Yes

Change DVD main PCB

Pin 45 and pin54~62 in
7-18E

No
IC1001 of DVD main PCB has clock and Check IC1001 peripheral circuit
digital video signal nomal
level?

Yes

Change DVD main PCB

 RDR-VX410

8. REPAIR PARTS LIST

8-1 Exploded Views ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-2

8-1-1 Cabinet Assembly ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-2

8-1-2 VCR Mechanical Parts (Top Side) --------------------------------------------------------------- 8-3

8-1-3 VCR Mechanical Parts (Bottom Side) ----------------------------------------------------------- 8-4

8-2 Electrical Parts List ------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-5

8-1
8-1 EXPLODED VIEWS
NOTE:
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may • The mechanical parts with no reference number
The components identified by mark 0 or
have some differences from the original one. in the exploded views are not supplied. dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they • Abbreviation Replace only with part number specified.
are seldom required for routine service. Some AU2 : Australian, New Zealand models
delay should be anticipated when ordering these B : French model Les composants identifiés par une marque
0 sont critiquens pour la sécurité.
items. E1, E2 : AEP model Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
GI : UK model le numéro spécifié.
8-1-1 Cabinet Assembly

not supplied
5
W272
602
W272

W202 W202
not supplied

P030 C015

not supplied
W252
W272
7
1 P025

not supplied

2
Except for Assy
Cylinder,
H/Cleaner Lever A001 not supplied
Assy 3
C003
4
9 6 C012

not supplied
C001
8 not supplied

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
1 9-885-084-31 ASSY-DVDR DECK C003 9-885-090-48 DOOR-CASSETTE (VX410 (E1), VX410 (E2))
2 9-885-079-49 ASSY DECK C003 9-885-096-77 DOOR-CASSETTE (VX410 (B))
3 9-885-090-49 DOOR-TRAY C003 9-885-096-78 DOOR-CASSETTE (VX410 (GI), VX410 (AU2))
4 9-885-069-96 SPRING ETC-DOOR SUS304WPB C012 3-080-528-01 SPRING ETC
5 9-885-090-43 FFC CABLE-FLAT C015 9-885-083-79 CABINET-TOP

6 9-885-056-92 SCREW TAP M2.6 L7 0 P025 9-885-095-68 CBF-POWER CORD 2P, 250V, 3A, BLK
7 9-885-069-91 SCREW-SPECIAL (VX410 (GI))
8 9-885-093-70 DOOR-BATTERY REMOCON (for RMT-D224P) 0 P025 9-885-095-72 CBF-POWER CORD 2P, 250V, 2.5A, BL
9 9-885-095-82 REMOCON DOOR-REMOCON (for RMT-D224P) (VX410 (B), VX410 (E1), VX410 (E2))
602 9-885-095-64 ASSY PCB-DIGITAL (DVD MAIN BOARD) 0 P025 9-885-095-76 CBF-POWER CORD 2P, 250V, 7.5A, BL
(VX410 (AU2))
A001 9-885-095-69 REMOCON- ASSY (RMT-D224P) P030 9-885-090-41 FAN-DC
C001 9-885-095-67 ASSY-PANEL FRONT (VX410 (GI)) W202 9-885-069-85 SCREW-TAPTITE ZPC (YEL) SWR
C001 9-885-095-71 ASSY-PANEL FRONT (VX410 (E1), VX410 (E2))
C001 9-885-095-74 ASSY-PANEL FRONT (VX410 (B)) W252 3-075-262-01 SCREW BH 4X12
C001 9-885-095-75 ASSY-PANEL FRONT (VX410 (AU2)) W272 3-078-566-01 SCREW TAP M3 L10 BLK

8-2
8-1-2 VCR Mechanical Parts (Top Side)

G001

K490
not supplied not supplied
G555

not supplied not supplied

G450
G510
not supplied G680
G420 G480 K546
K250
G560
K240

K248
not supplied

G681
B410

K110 K350

B440
not supplied not supplied
K340
not supplied
not supplied
G546
not supplied
not supplied K140

G527 G070
G520
G060

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
B410 1-796-434-11 LOADING ASSY, MOTOR G560 9-885-061-14 POST-#8 GUIDE ASSY
B440 9-885-067-38 SCREW MAC 3X3.3 G680 3-075-021-01 AUTO HEAD CLEANER (G680)
G001 9-885-095-66 ASSY-CYLINDER
G060 3-075-254-01 SCREW ASSY MAC 3X6 G681 3-075-022-01 AUTO HEAD CLEANER (G681)
G070 9-885-061-12 PLATE-GROUND DECK K110 3-075-046-01 DISK S REEL
K140 3-075-047-01 DISK T REEL
G420 3-079-347-01 SLIDER-SUPPLY ASSY K240 3-067-781-01 LEVER-TENSION
G450 3-079-346-01 SLIDER-TAKE UP ASSY K248 3-067-782-01 SPRING-TENSION LEVER
G480 9-885-083-60 ASSY ACE HEAD
G510 9-885-061-04 SCREW TAP M2.6X5.6 K250 3-067-783-01 BAND-BREAK
G520 9-885-053-44 LEVER-#9 GUIDE K340 3-067-785-01 LEVER-T. BRAKE
K350 3-067-786-01 SPRING-BRAKE
G527 3-067-780-01 SPRING-#9 GUIDE K490 3-067-788-01 HOLDER-FL CASS.
G546 9-885-061-11 LEVER-FL DOOR K546 3-067-789-01 GUIDE-CASS. DOOR
G555 9-885-053-45 UNIT PINCH ASSY

8-3
8-1-3 VCR Mechanical Parts (Bottom Side)

G542

B561
B462
not supplied
not supplied

B560
not supplied
not supplied
not supplied
not supplied

not not supplied

not supplied supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

B570

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
B462 9-885-056-92 SCREW TAP M2.6 L7 B570 9-885-061-03 SCREW CAP 2.6X6
B560 9-885-081-58 MOTOR CAPSTAN G542 3-067-790-01 BELT-PULLEY
B561 1-824-063-11 CABLE FLAT 10P

8-4
DV JACK DVD MAIN FUNCTION TIMER

8-2 ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

NOTE: • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are When indicating parts by reference number,
• Due to standardization, replacements in the seldom required for routine service. Some delay please include the board name.
parts list may be different from the parts should be anticipated when ordering these items.
specified in the diagrams or the components • SEMICONDUCTORS The components identified by mark 0 or
used on the set. In each case, u: µ, for example: dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
• -XX, and -X mean standardized parts, so they uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... , Replace only with part number specified.
may have some difference from the original one. uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... ,
• RESISTORS uPD..., µPD...
All resistors are in ohms. • CAPACITORS: • Abbreviation
METAL: metal-film resistor uF: µF AU2 : Australian, New Zealand models
METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor • COILS B : French model
F: nonflammable uH: µH E1, E2 : AEP model
• Not all of the parts are listed. GI : UK model

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
DV JACK BOARD FUNCTION TIMER BOARD
************** ********************

< JACK > < DIODE >

J1J 9-885-084-29 JACK-IEEE1394 4P/1C (DV IN) D701 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148
D702 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148
D703 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148
DVD MAIN BOARD D704 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148
*************** D705 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148

Note: Perform the reset whenever the IC203 or IC205 was replaced. D706 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148
(See page 10) D707 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148
D708 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148
9-885-095-64 ASSY PCB-DIGITAL (DVD MAIN BOARD)
< VFD DISPLAY >
< IC >
DT701 9-885-070-01 VFD DISPLAY HNV-10SM40
IC101 9-885-070-63 IC CS92686 (ENCODER/DECODER)
IC102 9-885-090-37 IC (DRAM) < IC >
IC103 9-885-090-37 IC (DRAM)
IC104 9-885-090-37 IC (DRAM) IC701 1-805-299-11 IC PT6315 (VFD)
IC105 9-885-090-37 IC (DRAM)
< LED >
IC201 9-885-070-62 IC CS98201 (DECODER)
IC202 9-885-090-38 IC (DRAM) LD701 9-885-070-41 LED (COPY VCRtDVD)
IC203 9-885-095-65 ASSY-MEMORY (FLASH MEMORY) LD702 9-885-070-41 LED (COPY DVDtVCR)
(Refer to Note) LD703 9-885-076-82 LED (PROGRESSIVE)
IC204 9-885-090-38 IC (DRAM) LD704 9-885-076-83 LED (SYNCRO REC)
IC205 9-885-095-70 IC (EEPROM) (Refer to Note)
< TRANSISTOR >
IC206 9-885-090-39 IC G9966 (POSI.FIXED REG.)
IC302 1-805-039-11 IC M74HCU04 Q701 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L
IC303 9-885-079-21 IC 74VHC125 (CMOS LOGIC) Q702 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L
IC1001 9-885-083-82 IC (VIDEO DECODER) Q703 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L
IC1301 9-885-070-64 IC TSB41AB1-PAP (DATA COMM/GEN) Q704 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L

< RESISTOR > < MODULE >

R39 9-885-083-84 BEAD-SMD 47ohm RM701 9-885-069-95 MODULE REMOCON TSOP2240RF1

R64 9-885-083-84 BEAD-SMD 47ohm
R103 9-885-083-84 BEAD-SMD 47ohm < SWITCH >
R1307 9-885-083-84 BEAD-SMD 47ohm
SW703 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (PAUSE)
< VIBRATOR > SW705 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (VIDEO)
SW706 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (COPYD2V)
X1001 9-885-070-70 CRYSTAL-SMD (24.576MHz) SW707 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (PLAY)
X1301 9-885-070-70 CRYSTAL-SMD (24.576MHz) SW708 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (DVD)

SW709 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (EJECT)

SW710 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (COPYV2D)
SW711 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (REC)

8-5
FUNCTION TIMER JACK
Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
SW713 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (FF) VZ812 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
SW714 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (OPEN) VZ813 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
VZ814 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
SW715 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (REW)
SW716 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (STOP) VZ815 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
VZ816 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
VZ817 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
JACK BOARD VZ818 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
********** VZ819 1-804-418-11 DIODE MTZJ12B

< CAPACITOR > VZ820 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B

VZ821 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
C4N22 1-165-563-11 CONDENSER 0.1uF VZ822 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
C6P01 1-100-020-11 CONDENSER 10000PF VZ823 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
CAS01 1-100-020-11 CONDENSER 10000PF VZ824 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
RAS11 1-100-020-11 CONDENSER 10000PF
VC7 1-165-563-11 CONDENSER 0.1uF VZ825 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
VZ826 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
VC8 1-165-563-11 CONDENSER 0.1uF VZ827 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
VC9 1-165-563-11 CONDENSER 0.1uF VZ828 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
VC10 1-165-563-11 CONDENSER 0.1uF VZ830 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
VC11 1-165-563-11 CONDENSER 0.1uF
VC17 1-165-563-11 CONDENSER 0.1uF VZ831 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
ZD801 1-804-803-11 DIODE MTZ6.2B
VC19 1-165-563-11 CONDENSER 0.1uF
< FERRITE BEAD >
< DIODE >
EBD1 9-885-083-84 BEAD-SMD 47ohm
AD1 1-805-012-11 DIODE DAN202K EBD2 9-885-083-84 BEAD-SMD 47ohm
AD2 1-805-012-11 DIODE DAN202K EBD3 9-885-083-84 BEAD-SMD 47ohm
AD3 1-805-012-11 DIODE DAN202K EBD4 9-885-083-84 BEAD-SMD 47ohm
AD4 9-885-070-11 DIODE DAN217 CVL1 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
AD5 1-805-012-11 DIODE DAN202K
CVL2 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
AMD1 1-805-013-11 DIODE DAP202K CVL3 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
AZ1 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B DOL2 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
AZ2 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B DOL4 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
AZ3 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B JL1 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
AZ4 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
JL2 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
D801 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148 R851 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
D4N01 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148 R852 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
D4N02 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148 R853 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
D6P01 1-805-012-11 DIODE DAN202K R854 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
DOZ1 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
R855 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
DOZ2 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B R856 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
VZ1 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B R831A 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
VZ2 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B R833A 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
VZ3 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B SVL1 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
VZ4 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
SVL2 1-400-316-11 CORE-FERRITE BEAD 220ohm
VZ5 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
VZ6 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B < FILTER >
VZ7 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
VZ8 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B DOL1 9-885-069-75 FILTER-EMI SMD
VZ9 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
< IC >
VZ10 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
VZ801 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B IC501 9-885-070-46 IC CS4391(D/A CONVERTER)
VZ802 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B IC502 9-885-070-47 IC (A/D CONVERTER)
VZ803 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B IC503 1-805-028-11 IC 4560 (OP AMP)
VZ804 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B IC504 1-805-028-11 IC 4560 (OP AMP)
IC801 9-885-069-93 IC SV1274/LA7274M
VZ805 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
VZ806 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B IC802 9-885-036-96 IC BU4053BCFV (CMOS LOGIC)
VZ807 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B IC4N01 1-804-795-11 IC (NICAM)
VZ808 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B IC6P01 9-885-095-57 IC LC74775NM-9808 (AUDIO)
VZ809 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B U1 1-805-022-11 IC 74VHCT125A (CMOS LOGIC)
VIC1 9-885-037-03 IC LA73054 (VIDEO)
VZ810 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B
VZ811 1-805-011-11 DIODE UDZ9.1B VIC2 9-885-068-25 IC MM1503XN (SELECTOR)

8-6
 JACK VCR MAIN
Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
SW3 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (CH DOWN)
< COIL > SW4 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (CH UP)

L1 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH < TUNER >

L3 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
L401 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH TM401 9-885-095-58 TM BLOCK TCSK0601PD25A, PAL
L801 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH (VX410 (GI), VX410 (E1), VX410 (E2))
L802 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH TM401 9-885-095-73 TM BLOCK TCPL0601PD25A, PAL
(VX410 (AU2), VX410 (B))
L803 1-400-079-11 INDUCTOR 33uH
L804 1-400-079-11 INDUCTOR 33uH < VIBRATOR >
L805 1-400-079-11 INDUCTOR 33uH
L806 1-400-079-11 INDUCTOR 33uH XT4N01 9-885-043-29 CRYSTAL (18.432MHz)
L807 1-400-079-11 INDUCTOR 33uH

L808 1-400-079-11 INDUCTOR 33uH VCR MAIN BOARD

L809 1-400-079-11 INDUCTOR 33uH **************
L810 1-400-079-11 INDUCTOR 33uH
L811 1-400-079-11 INDUCTOR 33uH SC1P02 3-075-255-01 SCREW TAP 3X8
L812 1-400-079-11 INDUCTOR 33uH SC1P05 3-075-255-01 SCREW TAP 3X8
SC1S01 3-075-255-01 SCREW TAP 3X8
L813 1-400-079-11 INDUCTOR 33uH SC1S30 3-075-255-01 SCREW TAP 3X8
L814 1-400-079-11 INDUCTOR 33uH SC1S31 3-075-255-01 SCREW TAP 3X8
L815 1-400-079-11 INDUCTOR 33uH
L4N02 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH SC1S32 3-075-255-01 SCREW TAP 3X8
L6P01 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH SC1S33 3-075-255-01 SCREW TAP 3X8

L6P03 1-400-078-11 INDUCTOR 22uH < CAPACITOR >

L6P05 1-400-148-11 INDUCTOR 27uH
PL3 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH C342 1-165-563-11 CONDENSER 0.1uF
PL4 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH C527 1-100-020-11 CONDENSER 10000PF
VL6 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH C610 1-165-563-11 CONDENSER 0.1uF
0 C1S02 1-100-358-11 CONDENSER CERAMIC DISC 100PF
< TRANSISTOR > 0 C1S03 1-100-358-11 CONDENSER CERAMIC DISC 100PF

AMQ1 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L 0 C1S04 9-885-081-57 CONDENSER FILM 47000PF

AMQ2 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L 0 C1S05 9-885-081-57 CONDENSER FILM 47000PF
AQ1 1-805-017-11 TRANSISTOR C1S07 1-165-990-11 CONDENSER 100PF
AQ2 1-805-018-11 TRANSISTOR KSR2103 C1S08 1-165-574-11 CONDENSER FILM 10000PF
AQ3 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L C1S12 1-165-574-11 CONDENSER FILM 10000PF

AQ4 1-805-017-11 TRANSISTOR C1S39 1-165-999-11 CONDENSER FILM 0.1uF

AQ5 1-805-018-11 TRANSISTOR KSR2103 C3A11 1-100-000-11 CONDENSER FILM 15000PF
AQ6 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L C3S01 1-100-020-11 CONDENSER 10000PF (VX410 B)
AQ7 1-805-017-11 TRANSISTOR C6B01 1-165-644-11 CONDENSER-AL 0.1F (VX410 (AU2))
AQ8 1-805-018-11 TRANSISTOR KSR2103 C6P01 1-100-020-11 CONDENSER 10000PF

AQ9 9-885-060-82 TRANSISTOR KSA812 C6P15 1-100-020-11 CONDENSER 10000PF

Q801 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L
Q802 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L < CONNECTOR >
Q803 9-885-043-26 TRANSISTOR KSR1104
Q804 9-885-043-26 TRANSISTOR KSR1104 CN301 1-815-685-11 CONNECTOR FPC 10P
CN303 1-815-688-11 CONNECTOR FPC 6PSN
Q805 1-805-018-11 TRANSISTOR KSR2103
Q806 1-805-018-11 TRANSISTOR KSR2103 < FLAT CABLE >
Q807 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L
Q808 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L CN01B 9-885-095-59 CABLE-FLAT 20PIN, 70mm
Q809 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L CN02B 9-885-095-60 CABLE-FLAT 27PIN, 80mm
CN303B 1-824-062-11 CABLE FLAT 6P
Q810 9-885-043-26 TRANSISTOR KSR1104
Q811 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L < DIODE >
Q6P02 9-885-060-82 TRANSISTOR KSA812
Q6P04 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L BD01 9-885-070-14 DIODE 1N5397GP
QAS01 9-885-060-82 TRANSISTOR KSA812 BD02 9-885-070-14 DIODE 1N5397GP
BD03 9-885-070-14 DIODE 1N5397GP
QAS02 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L BD04 9-885-070-14 DIODE 1N5397GP
QAS03 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L D301 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148
VQ1 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L
D603 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148
< SWITCH >
The components identified by mark
0 or dotted line with mark 0 are
SW1 1-786-353-11 TACT SWITCH (POWER) critical for safety.
Replace only with part number speci-
fied.
8-7
VCR MAIN
Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
D620 1-805-264-11 DIODE 1N5819 (VX410 (AU2)) < COIL >
D688 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148
D692 1-805-264-11 DIODE 1N5819 (VX410 (AU2)) BD1S01 1-400-085-11 INDUCTOR 70uH
D1P101 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148 BD1S02 1-400-085-11 INDUCTOR 70uH
L301 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
D1P102 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148 L302 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
D1P103 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148 L303 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
D1P104 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148
D1P105 1-805-264-11 DIODE 1N5819 (VX410 (AU2)) L304 1-400-086-11 FERRITE CORE
D1P201 1-805-264-11 DIODE 1N5819 (VX410 (AU2)) L501 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
L502 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
D1S05 1-804-408-11 DIODE UF4007 L602 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
D1S06 1-804-407-11 DIODE 1N4148 L603 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
D1S07 1-804-412-11 DIODE F1T4
D1S30 9-885-067-34 DIODE SRAF560 L605 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
D1S31 9-885-067-34 DIODE SRAF560 L1P02 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
L1P101 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
D1S32 9-885-076-80 DIODE MBRF10A0 0 L1S01 1-424-831-11 LINE FILTER 20mH
D1S33 9-885-076-80 DIODE MBRF10A0 L1S30 9-885-070-00 COIL CHOKE DR CHOKE (8*6)
D1S34 1-804-412-11 DIODE F1T4
D1S35 1-804-411-11 DIODE UG2D L1S31 9-885-070-00 COIL CHOKE DR CHOKE (8*6)
D1S36 1-804-412-11 DIODE F1T4 L1S32 1-424-828-11 COIL CHOKE 10uH
L3A01 1-400-083-11 INDUCTOR RA 15uH
D1S37 1-804-412-11 DIODE F1T4 L3A02 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
D1S40 1-804-412-11 DIODE F1T4 L3A03 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH
ZD401 1-804-414-11 DIODE UZP33B
ZD1P02 1-804-418-11 DIODE MTZJ12B L3A70 1-400-083-11 INDUCTOR RA 15uH
ZD1P03 1-804-417-11 DIODE MTZJ9.1B L3S01 1-400-074-11 INDUCTOR 100uH (VX410 (B))
L6P01 1-400-082-11 INDUCTOR RA 100uH
ZD1P04 1-804-416-11 DIODE MTZJ5.1B L6P03 1-400-078-11 INDUCTOR 22uH
ZD1P05 9-885-070-18 DIODE UZP27B L6P05 1-400-148-11 INDUCTOR 27uH
ZD1P06 9-885-070-17 DIODE UZ5.6BM
ZD1P101 1-804-417-11 DIODE MTZJ9.1B < LED >
ZD1S01 1-805-265-11 DIODE MTZJ4.3B
LD601 9-885-060-84 LED-IR (T/S LED)
ZD1S02 9-885-036-94 DIODE MTZJ20B
< TRANSFORMER >
< FUSE >
0 PT01 9-885-095-63 TRANS SWITCHING EER3531
0 F1S01 1-576-526-11 FUSE T.L (1.6A/250V)
0 FR01 1-576-729-11 FUSE-RADIAL LEAD (1A/50V) < PHOTO INTERRUPTER >
0 FR02 1-576-729-11 FUSE-RADIAL LEAD (1A/50V)
0 FR03 1-576-729-11 FUSE-RADIAL LEAD (1A/50V) PT601 9-885-060-86 PHOTO INTERRUPTER (S-R SENSOR)
PT602 9-885-060-86 PHOTO INTERRUPTER (T-R SENSOR)
< FUSE CLIP >
< TRANSISTOR >
FC1S01 1-576-527-11 FUSE CLIP
FC1S02 1-576-527-11 FUSE CLIP Q302 1-805-016-11 TRANSISTOR KSC1623-L (VX410 (B))
Q601 9-885-043-26 TRANSISTOR KSR1104
< IC > Q1P101 9-885-060-83 TRANSISTOR KSC2328AY
Q1P105 9-885-060-83 TRANSISTOR KSC2328AY
IC301 1-805-361-11 IC (VIDEO) Q1P106 1-804-429-11 TRANSISTOR KSR2001
IC501 1-804-703-11 IC (HIFI)
IC601 9-885-095-61 IC UPD78F4928GF-3BA (MICOM) Q1P107 1-804-421-11 TRANSISTOR KSC945
IC604 1-804-704-11 IC (RESET) (EXCEPT VX410 (AU2)) Q1P108 9-885-060-83 TRANSISTOR KSC2328AY
IC604 1-804-773-11 IC (RESET) (VX410 (AU2)) Q1P109 9-885-060-83 TRANSISTOR KSC2328AY
Q1P110 9-885-060-83 TRANSISTOR KSC2328AY
IC605 9-885-095-62 IC S524A60X51 (EEPROM) Q1P201 9-885-070-38 FET FQP33N10 (VX410 (AU2))
IC608 1-804-705-11 IC (POWER DETECT) (VX410 (AU2))
IC1P01 9-885-084-28 IC (SWITCH VOL. REG) Q1P201 9-885-084-19 FET GFP50N03
IC1P02 9-885-084-28 IC (SWITCH VOL. REG) (EXCEPT VX410 (AU2))
IC1P03 9-885-070-56 IC G9105 (POSI. FIXED REG) Q1PS01 1-804-421-11 TRANSISTOR KSC945
Q1PS02 1-804-422-11 TRANSISTOR KTC3203
IC1P04 9-885-084-28 IC (SWITCH VOL. REG) Q1PS03 1-804-429-11 TRANSISTOR KSR2001
IC1P05 9-885-092-81 IC 278R05 (POSI. FIXED REG.) Q1S01 9-885-036-95 FET
IC1S01 9-885-037-01 IC (PWM CONTROLLER)
0 IC1S02 1-804-440-11 PHOTO COUPLER Q3A01 1-804-421-11 TRANSISTOR KSC945
IC1S03 1-804-445-11 IC KA4318 Q3A02 1-804-420-11 TRANSISTOR KSA733
Q3A03 1-804-422-11 TRANSISTOR KTC3203
IC3S01 1-804-701-11 IC (SECAM) (VX410 B)
IC6P01 1-804-454-11 IC (OSD) The components identified by mark
0 or dotted line with mark 0 are
critical for safety.
Replace only with part number speci-
fied.
8-8
 VCR MAIN
Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks Ref. No. Part No. Description Remarks
Q3A04 1-804-422-11 TRANSISTOR KTC3203 ACCESSORIES
Q3A05 1-804-422-11 TRANSISTOR KTC3203 ************
2-637-391-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH)
Q3A06 9-885-060-82 TRANSISTOR KSA812 (VX410 GI))
Q6P01 1-804-420-11 TRANSISTOR KSA733 2-637-392-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH)
Q6P02 1-804-420-11 TRANSISTOR KSA733 (VX410 (E2))
2-637-392-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (PORTUGUESE)
< RESISTOR > (VX410 (E2))
2-637-392-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SWEDISH)
R1S04 1-244-373-11 RESISTOR 2.7 (VX410 (E2))
R1S13 1-245-575-11 R-METAL OXIDE 2-637-392-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (DANISH)
(VX410 (E2))
< PHOTO TRANSISTOR >
2-637-392-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FINNISH)
S601 9-885-060-85 PHOTO TRANSISTOR (END SENSOR) (VX410 (E2))
S602 9-885-060-85 PHOTO TRANSISTOR (START SENSOR) 2-637-392-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH)
(VX410 (B), VX410 (E1))
< SWITCH > 2-637-392-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (GERMAN)
(VX410 (E1))
SW601 9-885-061-06 SWITCH MODE (MODE SWITCH) 2-637-392-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (DUTCH)
SW602 9-885-061-07 SWITCH REC (REC SWITCH) (VX410 (E1))
2-637-392-91 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN)
< VARISTOR > (VX410 (E1))

VA1S01 1-804-437-11 VARISTOR 2-653-115-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH)

(VX410 (AU2))
< VIBRATOR > 9-885-093-70 DOOR-BATTERY REMOCON (for RMT-D224P)
9-885-095-82 REMOCON DOOR-REMOCON (for RMT-D224P)
XT301 1-795-330-11 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL (4.433619MHz) 9-885-095-69 REMOCON- ASSY (RMT-D224P)
XT601 1-795-332-11 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL (32.768kHz)
(VX410 (AU2))
XT602 1-795-331-11 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL (8MHz)

MISCELLANEOUS
***************

1 9-885-084-31 ASSY -DVDR DECK

5 9-885-090-43 FFC CABLE-FLAT
B410 1-796-434-11 LOADING ASSY, MOTOR
B560 9-885-081-58 MOTOR CAPSTAN
B561 1-824-063-11 CABLE FLAT 10P

G001 9-885-095-66 ASSY -CYLINDER

G480 9-885-083-60 ASSY ACE HEAD
0 P025 9-885-095-68 CBF-POWER CORD 2P, 250V, 3A, BLK
(VX410 (GI))
0 P025 9-885-095-72 CBF-POWER CORD 2P, 250V, 2.5A, BL
(VX410 (B), VX410 (E1), VX410 (E2))
0 P025 9-885-095-76 CBF-POWER CORD 2P, 250V, 7.5A, BL
(VX410 (AU2))

P030 9-885-090-41 FAN-DC

The components identified by mark

0 or dotted line with mark 0 are
critical for safety.
Replace only with part number speci-
fied.
8-9E
RDR-VX410

Sony Corporation
2005H0500-1
Home Electronics Network Company © 2005.8
9-874-887-11 — 164 — Published by Quality Assurance Dept.